Secure PDF Dig5 PDF

siemens.com/poweracademy Restricted Siemens AG 2013 All rights reserved.
Siemens Power Academy TD

DIGSI 5 Basics
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G

DIGSI 5 Basics

0.
Agenda
1.
Specification of 220 kV Feeder
Protection and Automation
2.
Basic function of SIPROTEC 5
3.
Hardware Overview
4.
Communication Modules
5.
Software Components
6.
Function Groups and Application Templates
7.
Order Configurator and Function Points
8.
Documentation
9.
DIGSI 5 - Overview
10.
DIGSI 5 - Configure
11.
DIGSI 5 - Control Functions
12.
DIGSI 5 - Online Connection to the device
13.
DIGSI 5 - Expansion of function points
14.
Curriculum Approach & Contacts

Siemens Power Academy
Siemens AG
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Restricted Siemens AG 2013 All rights reserved.
Siemens Power Academy TD Course Title F00_Page 1
SIPROTEC 5 / DIGSI 5 Basic i3D Intern (3 days)
Bruhnke (Winter), IC SG SE PTI PA
Lunch Lunch Lunch
13:00 16:30
Ex 11:
Display Power Flow and SF6 Lost
Ex 12a: Expansion of Function Points
13:00 17:00
Ex 05:
Implementation of Control Functions with DIGSI 5
Ex 06:
Design of SIP5 Display Pages with DIGSI 5
13:00 16:30
Presentation of Height Lights
SIP 5 Hardware Concept (Chap.3.1)
SIP 5 Communication Concept (Chap.3.2)
SIP 5 Software Concept (Chap.4)
Ex 07a:
Implementation of Protection Functions (Distance1)
Ex 07b:
Ex 07c:
Implementation of Protection Functions
(Overcurrent)
SIP 5 Function Groups & Application Templates (Chap.5)
Ex 3a :SIP 5 Device Orders No. with SIP 5 Online
Configuration (Chap.6)
Ex 3b SIP 5 Module Orders No. with SIP 5 Online
Day 3 Day 2 Day 1
9:00 12:00
Ex 08: Online Mode
Online Operation with SIPROTEC 5
Edit time and date
Monitoring of Log Lists
Reading of Fault Recorts
Saving of Process Data
Download of Settings with
Expert Configuration
Compare Devices
9:00 12:00
SIP 5 Documentations (Chap.7)
DIGSI 5
HW and SW performance
Installation (Chap.8.2)
License
Device Driver
9:00 12:00
Ex 1a:
SIPROTEC 5 Scope of Supply of 20kV Feeder
(Chap.1)
Ex 1b:
Basic Functions of SIPROTEC 5 (Teamwork)
(Chap.2)
Ex 2a:
Handling of SIPROTEC 5 (Teamwork)
Ex 2b:
Height lights of SIP 5 (Teamwork)
Ex 09:
Logic Function Charts (CFC)
Flashing LEDs
Ex 10:
Logic Function Charts (CFC) Setting Group
Changing
Ex 04a:
Design of 220 kV Feeder SLD with DIGSI 5
Ex 04b:
Design of SIP 5 Device with DIGSI 5
Group 1: HW Concept (Chap.3.1)
Group 2: Communication Concept (Chap.3.2)
Group 3: I/O , CT & VT Terminals (Chap.3.1)
Group 4: Dimensions of SIP 5 (Manual)
Preparation:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
www.siemens.com/poweracademy Copyright Siemens AG 2013. All rights reserved.
01 Specification of 220 kV Feeder Protection and Automation
SIPROTEC 5 /
DIGSI 5 BASIC Course
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
01 Specification of 220 kV SG
SIPROTEC 5/ DIGSI 5 Basic Course
Version: D_10_Page 2
Specification of 220 kV Feeder-Protection and Automation
=

D

0
1
3
~
5
0
H
z

2
2
0

k
V
1
0
0

k
m
2
2
0

k
V
:
-
B
A

1
1
2
2
0

k
V
:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
=

D

0
2
-
Q
C

1
1
-
Q
C

2
1
2
2
0

k
V
:
2
2
0

k
V
:
3
2
2
0

k
V
:
-
B
A

1
1
-
B
A

2
1
-
Q
B

1
1
-
Q
B

2
1
-
Q
C

1
-
Q
C

2
3
~
5
0
H
z

2
2
0

k
V
-
Q
A
1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
This specification covers the design of a HV substation protection system.
A combined distance and Two end differential protection relay (3 pol.) shall be provided to protect and control the OHL feeder =D01
and the Busbar Coupler =D02.
The devices should have 19 binary inputs, 12 Standard and 3 Fast binary outputs.
The protection device has to have 2 Voltage- and 2 Current-systems interfaces for Line 800/1 5P30 48 VA (Error 1%/ 5%)
and for BC 2500/1 5P30 40 VA (Error 1%/ 5%) (CT neutr. point not to objects). The 220 kV Network is insulated.
The device should be flexible enough to activate maximal additional protection functions at any time without changing the device and
without additional costs.
The interface for GOOSE communication should be separated from the differential protection interface.
The protection device should have a changeable FO-interface with dual ports, one channel for two end line differential protection
and one channel for existing Substation Automation System with IEC 60870-5-103.
For the communication to the new Substation Automation System and for Inter-device-GOOSE-communication should be use IEC
61 850 protocol. For IEC 61850 should be use a separate changeable electrical module with two canals and integrated Ethernet-
switch.
The protection devise should communicate over a separate Ethernet-interface for DIGSI 5.
The device should be flush mounting and provide local control functionality with a large display and key switches and should have
32 LEDs, 16 LEDs of those should be color changeable.
The power supply in the substation is 48 V DC.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
www.siemens.com/poweracademy Copyright Siemens AG 2012. Al l rights reserved.
SIPROTEC 5/
DIGSI 5 BASIC-Course
02 Basic function of SIPROTEC 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
50 51 87L 50BF 25 79 21
A V f P
Q cos A max
-kWh +kWh
SW HW I=0
SF6 loss Pick up CB Live ti me
Trip log Status log Alarm log
t/s
-0,4 -0,3 -0,2 -0,1 -0,0 0,1 0, 2 0,3 0,4 0,5
CurrentiL2/ A
-4
-2
0
2
Local
Remode
SLD
Sequences Bay Interlocking
DCF 77 GPS IRIG B IEC 103
IEC 103 IEC 61850 GOOSE
Safe CT Interl ock
Passwort
BI BO
Interfase I-Simulation
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Time Synchronization
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 Protection Application
SIPROTEC 5 includes all protection functions for transmission and subtransmission networks
SIPROTEC 5 is applicable for different substation designs
Single, double and triple busbar designs
1,5 CB schemes, .
Application templates are available for different schemes
Pre configuration reduces the engineering efforts
User defined standards leads simplification and repeatability
Copying of functions and setting between the devices
The library concept increases the flexibility
Required functions can easily be loaded into the device
A wide range of proven protection functions are available
Possible extensions are made simple (add stages, zones,..)
A clear functional structure (function groups) clusters the functions, allows flexible
applications and guarantees correct operation
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 Control and Automation
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 includes all functions for Control and Automati on of transmission
and subtransmission networks
CFC (continuous function chart) includes all elements for interlocking
Local control on the device
Remote control through DIGSI
Remote control from the SSA through serial interface
Application templates are available with predefined interlocking
User defined standardization
Complete Station interlocking through IEC61850 and GOOSE
Automation solutions
Tap changer control
Intelligent load shedding (active power +frequency)
Network changeover, stability supervision
Management of distributed generation in Smart Grid plants
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 includes all functions for effective monitoring of transmission
and subtransmission network
Self supervision
All internal hardware components and external interfaces, runtime of software
Clear text indication (cause of failure and countermeasure)
Monitoring of pri mary equipment
Operational log records process data with a time stamp (up to 2000 events)
Monitoring of the system through measurement supervision (voltage and frequency, power
and load) and through measuring transducer (analogue 4 to 20 mA ) inputs
(SF6 loss, gas pressure, temperature,)
Powerful fault analysis
Fault recording with a high sampling rate and a long period (8 kHz & 20s or 1 kHz & 160 s)
Trip log with 1 ms resolution and up to 1000 events
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 Communication
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
SICAM PAS
Netzleitstelle
SICAM PAS
Redundant i nterfaci ng to control center,
e.g. with DNP3, (bl ack)
Connecti on to both substati on systems
IEC 61850 (bl ue)
IEC 60870-5-103 (rot)
Separate connecti on to field level for
GOOSE communication IEC 61850 (grn)
Separate connecti on to DIGSI 5 PC wi th
Et hernet IEC 61850
SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 5
DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 includes powerful communi cation functionality
Flexible communication modules standard hardware components (physical hardware is independent
of software)
Support of standard communication protocols
IEC 61850; IEC 60870-5-103
DNPi 3.0,.
Flexible communication solutions are possible
Double 103 protocol
Redundant topologies with SSA
Powerful protection data interface (for differential protection, data exchange in substation, DIGSI 5
communication)
Communication is the key feature of all applications
Smart grid means flexibility in communication
SIPROTEC 5 supports Cyber Security requirements
Present standards are fulfilled (NERC CIP, BDEW,)
DIGSI 5 communication with encryption and strong password access
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5/
03 Hardware Overview
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Overview: Look from the outside
Types of IO-Modules
Rear view, Principle of terminal naming
Typical Devices
A closer look to the inside
Summary
SIPROTEC 5: Modular Hardware Design
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Wath are new ?
Modular device concept, freely configurable
Delivered devices can be expanded with 1/6-moduls
without problems
Customers can configure their individual device for
specific applications
Up to 40 analog input channels (U, I)

S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Base Module with Expansion Modules
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Mounting of an expansion module
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Detailed view on module connections
Robust and stable
connection
between parts
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Different Types of Operator Panels for Base Module
Small Display Large Display
No Display
Dual Color
LEDs
(settable to
green or red)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Operator Panels for expansion modules
Without LED With LED With LED and key switches
Single
Color
LEDs
(red)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Surface mounted device front view
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Operating Elements
of HMI
Control of Switching Elements
Numerical Keys
and Function Keys
LED Acknowledge
and Reset of
latched
information
USB plug-in
Description Field
for LEDs
Description Field
for Function Keys
Cursor Keys
Key Switch S5
Remote/Local
Key Switch S1
Interlocking Off / Normal
Context Sensitive Keys
16 LEDs (red)
Description Field
for LEDs
Base Module
Expansion Module
16 LEDs (green or
red, selectable)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Change of Current Transformer
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Current Transformer is inside of Current Terminal
Current terminal
Voltage terminal
(for voltage measurement, BI, BO)
Current
transformer
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Change of modules
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5: Types of IO-Boards
Properties of IO-Boards
14 different IO boards have been designed to meet the requirements for
the possible applications.
Elements to be combined on the different IO boards:
Binary Inputs (with and without common potentials)
Relay: Relay Standard 9 ms (Make contact, normally open)
Relay Standard (Change over contact)
Relay Fast 6 ms (Make contact, normally open)
Relay Fast (Change over contact)
Power-Relay
High-Speed Relay 0,2 ms (semi-conductor speed-up)
Current Transducer Input (Protection or Measurement)
Voltage Transducer Input
Measurement transducer input (20mA)
Plug-In-Modules (Communication, 20mA Input, Memory,)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (1)
PS201
Life Contact
IO201
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (2)
IO202 IO203
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (3)
IO205 IO206
Variant of IO205
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (4)
IO207
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (5)
IO208 IO209
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (6)
IO214
Variant of IO202
CB202
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Label: Position
and type of IO
Battery
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Rear view, Principle of Terminal Naming
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Example of Typical Devices (1/2)
Base Module with IO202
4xI, 4xU, 11BI, 8BO,
1 Life Contact
Basic protection relay for
directional measuring
Base Module with
IO208 and Extension
Module with IO202
8xI, 8xU, 15BI, 19BO,
1 Life Contact
Protection relay for two
measuring points
(1,5 circuit breaker method)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Base Module with
IO202 and Extension
Modules with IO202 and
3xIO207
4xI, 4xU, 67BI, 38BO,
1 Life Contact
Bay Controller for double
bus feeder with large
number of IO signals
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Look to the inside (1/2)
PS201 IO20x IO20x
Local power bus 28V
1,5V
3,3V
5V
-5V
11V
Distributed Power Supply
for high availability and high
EMC resistance
Thermal load is distributed
All voltages are supervised
detailed diagnostic
Wide Range PS (24/48 V DC,
60-220V AC/DC)
24/48V range will not be
damaged if connected to
higher voltage
Highlights of Power Supply
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Cross-wiring of Current and
Voltage Groups to different
A/D Converters
Fast error detection for
A/D converters
A/D converter 24 Bit
(SIPROTEC4: 22 Bit)
better accuracy
Calibration factor on current
transformer terminal
EEPROM
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

C
l
a
m
p

8

p
o
l
.
I
U
5 Ranges
I
U
5 Ranges
I
U
5 Ranges
I
U
5 Ranges
A
D
4 channel
Sigma
Delta 1
U
U
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
l
a
m
p

1
4

p
o
l
.
U
U
U
U
U
U
A
D
4 channel
Sigma
Delta 2
Highlights of A/D sampling
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Summary and Highlights (1/2)
without problems
Customers can configure their individual device for specific
applications
Devices without Jumpers no more opening
of device
1A/5A-rated current will be set electronically.
Three thresholds of binary inputs (15V, 71V, 154V) can be
set individually using software
Powerful signal processing
Sampling rate up to 16 kHz (protection 1kHz)
Maximum 40 analog channels (24 for protection)
Prepared for PMU functionality
Draw out of terminal blocks
Simple exchange of current transformers
Pre-Wiring is possible
Change to sensitive ground fault CT input is possible after
ordering
Service-friendly
Opening of device not necessary (battery, modules,can
be changed without opening)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
On-Site operation panel, visualization
9 freely configurable function keys
Option of small and large display for all devices
Up to 16 multicolor LEDs + the option of 4*16 red LEDs
IEC61508 Certification
Safety standard, certificate scheduled for step 2
all necessary developments are available in step 1
Memory module 8 GB (step 2)
For long-time fault records
For power quality data
Identical Wiring for panel-mounted and
surface-mounted device
Standardization saves time
Standardization prevents from errors
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
04 Communication modules
SIPROTEC 5 /
DIGSI 5 Basic Course
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Plugin modules hardware
and general features
Initial communication
configuration
Assignment for protocols
Protocol features - Overview
Protocol testing
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Front view of the device with USB interfaces
USB interface for PC with DIGSI 5
Standard USB cable (no special cable required)
No USB hub supported
Initialize device via USB interface necessary for
the initial configuration
USB interface for a memory stick
Allow connection of a memory stick
Future features possible like:
Read out file system, logs and fault records
Authorize with a memory stick (user authorization)
Device replacement. Device configuration stored
on the memory stick.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Rear view of the device with terminals, plug-in-module
positions and communication ports (1)
Plug-in module (Position E)
Can be equipped with every available plug in-module
Modules can be changed without opening the device
Different electrical or optical modules available for
serial or Ethernet based protocols and applications
E
F
Plug-in module (Position F)
Can be equipped with every available plug-in-module
Integrated Ethernet interface (Port J )
Rear standard Ethernet interface for DIGSI 5
Option: Cost effective IEC 61850 client server
communication (for six clients,
no GOOSE messages)
J
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Time synchronization port (Port G)
Time telegrams IRIB-B00 from GPS receiver
Time telegrams from a DFC 77 receiver
1 s pulse for high precision time sync. applications
Fully pin compatible with SIPROTEC 4 Port A
(all external converters and cables can be
used)
G
Separate/remote operational panel
(Port H)
Connection to remote operational panel
External panel will be fully supplied by this port
H
K
Com-Link to expansion module (Port K)
Communication link to expansion module CB202
Special Ethernet link (can not be used as
standard Ethernet connection)
CB202 can not be used stand alone
J
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Rear view of expansion module CB202
for 3 additional plug-in module
Plug-in module (Position N)
Plug-in module (Position M)
Can be equipped with special plug-in-modules
(20 mA analog inputs)
Not designed for use with communication modules
Com-Link to base module (Port L)
Communication link to Port K of base module
L
M
N
P
Terminal block
For independent wide range power supply
Plug-in module (Position P)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
A trend-setting communication architecture
A new communication design
Hardware and communication design is like playing with LEGO bricks
Building new functions through use of programmable FPGA
1)
hardware
(HDLC controller, time tagging, MAC address filtering for GOOSE).
Microprocessors is running inside the FPGA
Different applications running on one module type
(Serial protocols and protection data interface on one type of module)
Separation of communication (plug-in module) and protection / control application
(main CPU)
from easyone
to complex functions
1) Field programmable gate array
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Communication plug-in modules
A common architecture is used for all modules
Ethernet module
without / with integrated switch
Universal
serial module with 2 optical ports
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

b
u
s

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
w
i
t
h

E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t

l
i
n
k
s
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

b
u
s

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
P
h
y
s
i
c
a
l

f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d
P
h
y
s
i
c
a
l

f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
o
r

w
i
t
h
f
u
l
l
y

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
a
b
l
e
h
a
r
d
w
a
r
e
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
o
r

w
i
t
h
f
u
l
l
y

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
a
b
l
e
h
a
r
d
w
a
r
e
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

p
h
y
s
i
c
a
l
f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d

(
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
)
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

p
h
y
s
i
c
a
l
f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d

(
s
e
r
i
a
l
)
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
o
r

w
i
t
h
f
u
l
l
y

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
a
b
l
e
h
a
r
d
w
a
r
e
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

p
h
y
s
i
c
a
l
f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d

(
s
e
r
i
a
l
)
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

b
u
s

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
P
h
y
s
i
c
a
l

f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Serial electrical and optical communication module
with one or two independent ports
One or two RS485 ports with RJ 45
connectors for one / two independent protocol
applications
Use of standard Ethernet patch cables saves
cost for cabling (no 7XV5103 cables required)
Each module has a unique readable name
(e.g. USART-AB-1EL, USART-AC-2EL)
One or two 820 nm fiber optical ports with
ST connectors for one / two
independent protocol applications
Optical connector and cabling fully compatible
to SIPROTEC 4. Multimode-fiber 62,5/125 m
(e.g. USART-AD-1FO, USART-AE-2FO)
Synchronous (HDLC or IEEE C37.94)
or asynchronous operation mode
Electrical module with RS485 interface
Fiber optical module with
820 nm interface
U
S
A
R
T
-A
C
-2
E
L
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Optical long distance communication modules
One or two 1300 / 1550 nm ports with LC
simplex or LC duplex connectors for one/two
Spanned distance over single mode fiber
24 km / 60 km / 100 km with 2 fibers
40 km over 1 fiber (integrated WDM*)
Saves expensive fibers for long distances
Spanned distance over multimode fiber
4 km with 2 fiber cables
Identical hardware like 24 km
single mode module
(e.g. USART-AF-1LDFO, USART-AW-2LDFO)
* Wave division multiplexer
Optical long distance module
with two 1300 or 1550 nm interfaces
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Optical or electrical Ethernet module
Two ports without or with integrated switch
Spanned distance over electrical Ethernet
Two RJ 45 connectors
20 m with CAT5 double shielded cables
Spanned distance over optical Ethernet
2 LC-duplex connectors
2 km with 50/125 um or 62,5/125 um fiber cables
Operation without or with the integrated switch
for the optical and electrical Ethernet module
One or two ports connected to an external switch.
Active port and hot standby port if one
connection fails (as SIPROTEC 4 EN100)
Operation with integrated switch. RSTP for max. 40
devices in a Ethernet ring topology. This mode is
available for every Ethernet based application (e.g.
IEC 61850, DNP 3, syncrophasor protocol ...... )
(e.g. ETH-BA-2EL, ETH-BB-2FO)
Electrical Ethernet module with
two electrical ports
Optical Ethernet module with
two optical ports
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
General features of the communication in
SIPROTEC 5 devices
Two module positions in the base housing (E / F). Another three module
positions on CB202 extension for communication (M,N,P)
Customer orders plug-in modules which are not preconfigured with a protocol
or communication - application.
Protocols or applications running on plug-in modules are assigned to the
specific module and it's port with DIGSI 5 during the initial configuration
process.
Two serial communication applications running on one module offer a high application
density (e.g. IEC 60870-5-103 and protection data interface on one USART-AE2FO module).
Communication redundancy (+time sync.)
Hardware redundancy (e.g. two substation control interfaces pluggable, two ports)
Optical or electrical ring configuration (no interruption of the ring when CB202 is supplied from
another battery as the main device)
Functional redundancy (e.g. redundant protocols with 2*IEC 60870-5-103)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
configuration
Protocol testing
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Which protocol applications are running on
which module?
Protocols running on serial modules:
IEC 60870-5-103, DNP 3, PI (Protection Interface)
Protocols running on Ethernet modules:
IEC 61850 (C/S
1)
, GOOSE), DNP 3, IEEE C37.118, SNTP, RSTP, DCP, DIGSI 5
1) Clients <->Server
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
05 Software Components of the SIPROTEC 5 system
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
05 Software Components
About the SIPROTEC 5 Software components
which components are available, compared to SIPROTEC 4
which components can be handled individually by the user
What you will learn
Training Objective
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
SIPROTEC 4 system
Legend:
component with own version in the user view;
component can be altered (loaded) individually
A SIPROTEC 4 device consists of the following major
components:
Device Firmware (FW)
Device Parameter set (PS)
Both components are handled individually, meaning
that no 1:1 relation exists, but a n:m.
E.g. FW V4.80 is compatible to PS V4.73
The device functionality is defined by the firmware.
Therefore the firmware is the leading version in the
users' view.
(e.g. approvals usually refer to the FW version)
V4 device
Firmware (FW)
- operating system
- no. & types of prot. &
autom. functions
- all inter-connections
- CFC blocks
- text font
Parameter set (PS)
- settings
- routing
- CFC charts
- graphic display
- (text pool)
com mapping
(text pool)
boot system
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
SIPROTEC 5 compared to SIPROTEC 4
V4 device
Firmware (FW)
- operating system
autom. functions
- CFC blocks
- text font
Parameter set (PS)
- settings
- routing
- CFC charts
- graphic display
- (text pool)
com mapping
(text pool)
boot system
V5 device
Firmware (FW)
- operating system
- applic. Operating sys
- CFC block
Configuration (CFG)
autom. functions
- inter-con. (MP, FG)
- settings
- routing
- CFC charts
- graphic display
- HDF (HW descript. File)
DAF (dev. Attributes f. )
com. mapping
(text pool)
text font
boot system
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
SIPROTEC 5 system
A SIPROTEC 5 device consists of the following
two major components:
Device Configuration (CFG)
Both components are handled individually (n:m
relationship).
The device functionality is defined by the
firmware AND the configuration. Therefore the
firmware is no longer the one leading version in
the users view. It is FW and CFG version.
E.G. an approval must document both versions.
All other components can be changed
individually.
V5 device
Firmware (FW)
- operating system
- CFC block
Configuration (CFG)
autom. functions
- settings
- routing
- CFC charts
- graphic display
com. mapping
(text pool)
text font
boot system
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
There are some differences compared to SIPROTEC 4:
Two major components which define the device functionality and which must be
communicated when talking about device functionality
The DAF-file: This file defines the no. of function points which are allowed for the
device (and therefore define the possible no. of functions with cost)
More individually loadable components
Advantages:
Point 2 allows to upgrade the device functionality just by downloading a new DAF
file, without touching the actual application
Point 3 allows to remedy faults - if they are located in these components - without
touching the application, e.g. a text pool fault
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
SIPROTEC 5 system
Further information:
All installable components are delivered and installed on the PC through the
DIGSI device driver(DDD-file)
how to install: refer to DIGSI lesson
No separate FW update toolused. All updates are carried out through
DIGSI.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
06 Function groups and application template
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
06 Function groups and application templates
Content
Content
Function-structure concept
Application template
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: The advantages
1.The same function can be used in different devices
user statement: why is the 7SA BF protection functiondifferent from 7SJ ?
the above fact causes confusion / clarification
2.Better response timeregarding customer requirements
functional improvement for function A in device type X is also available for function A in
device type Y (only the release for this device is required)
3.The user has not to buyfunctions which are not required for his application
4.Functions and their settings could be copied within one device or between devices
5.Enhanced functional flexibility, e.g.
another protection stage can be added
a function can be routed to any analogue input
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
SIPROTEC 5 provides modular functions
21
50
51
49
81
59
27
25
79
48
Functions can be moved !

21
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
The functions are grouped to primary objects like Line, CB,
via so called Function Groups
Function groups (FG)
21
51
49
81
59
25
79
FG Line FG CB
trip
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
A device will incorporate different function groups, e.g. a distance protection
device:
Line: includes protection functions related to a line
CB: includes functions related to a CB
Further function groups: transformer, motor, disconnector,
21
51
49
81 59
FG Line FG CB
25 79
trip
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
How do functions receive their measurement values?
The Functi on Groups (FG) incorporate Interfaces for current / voltage
measurement values
The functions in the FG are assigned automatically to these interfaces
21
51
49
81 59
FG Line FG CB
IF
IF
79
trip
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
The Functi on Groups (FG) receive measured values from Measuri ng
Points (MP) via the interfaces
The connection between FG and MP is configurable by DIGSI 5
21
49
81 59
FG Line FG CB
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
MP-I
IF
51
trip
79
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
The Measuring Points (MP) are routed to the analogue input terminals
The connection between MP and terminal is configurable by DIGSI 5
FG Line FG CB
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
21
49
81 59
51
trip
79
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
How do functions process
the operation of the CB
and other relevant information to other functions, e.g. to Automatic
Reclosing?
FG are connected via Interfaces, to process this data,
again: functions are assigned to these interfaces
The connection is made using DIGSI 5
FG Line FG CB
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
IF IF
21
49
81 59
51
trip
79
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Device
FG CB
trip
79
IF
Modularity: How?
Reclosing?
FG Line
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
21
49
81 59
51
trip
79
FG
CB
IF
trip
79
FG
CB IF
IF
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Device
FG CB
trip
79
IF
Modularity: How?
How are commands and signals processed to device terminals?
Commands & signals are routed to the BOs (terminals) by DIGSI 5
FG Line
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
21
49
81 59
51
IF IF
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of the chosen Application Template
Device 7SL87, AT Basic
FG Line
21
51
MP-I
MP-V
FG CB
Int.Lk
IF
IF
IF IF
Ctrl
51N 50
FL
78
87
More detailed form: all interfaces shown simplified form:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Device
Modularity: How?
How? SIPROTEC 5-functions may contain a flexible no. of stages
(protection elements)
Function-stages can be moved !
51
51-1
51-2
51-3
Function
Function-stages
FG Line
21
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: Moving of functions
Moving of functions:
Remove (delete) from a FG
Add from the library
Copy from FG 1 to FG 2
Copy within a FG
Copy from device x to device y
Device A, Application x
FG 1
21
51
59
DIGSI 5 Library
21
:
27
25
48
27
FG 2
51 51
Device B, Application y
FG 1
21
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: Moving of function groups
Configuration and moving of function-groups:
Add from the library, e.g. for 1,5 CB appl.
Device, Application x
FG Line
DIGSI 5 Library
MP-I
MP-V
FG type CB
21
FG CB-A
25
MP-V
FG type x
25
MP-V MP-V
FG CB-B
25
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Copy within the application
Copy from device A to device B
Delete within an application
FG line
MP-I
MP-V
21
FG CB B
25
MP-V
FG CB A
25
MP-V
Device B
FG Line
21
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: Review
Device 7xyz, Application xyz
Functions (FNs) may contain stages, the no. of stages can be altered
FNs are grouped via the functi on groups (FGs)
FGs are interconnected via interfaces (IF), the connection is configurable
FGs are connected to measuring points (MPs) via interfaces,
the connection is configurable
MPs and Circuit-breaker FG are connected to the terminals, the
connection is configurable
FG Line
21
51 49
81 59
27
FG CB
27
27-1
27-2
25 79
trip
IF
IF
IF IF
MP-I
MP-V
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Lets review, important terms:
Function group (FG)
Function (FN)
Stage
Measuring point (MP)
Interfaces (IF) of FGs
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Settings & information
Device A / application x
Details: Have a look at the settings and information hierarchy
FG 1
FN 1
Stage 1
settings, information
Stage 2
FN 2
Group Inform.
information
General
Stage 1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
What for?
How do we support the user to start his engineering work as close to his
application as possible?
Via offering so called Application Templates.
The Application template is the predefinition of the overall device
functionality, it defines:
1. Default-composition of stages, FNs, FGs, MPs and their connections
2. Default settings and default signal routing
3. Default device display
4. Default CFC-charts
it is a little bitcomparable to the SIPROTEC 4 parameter set
Application Confi guration:
Actual device functionality (evolved from an AT)
Next click next page
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Differences to SIPROTEC 4 and benefits
Free composition of stages, FNs, FGs, MPs and their connections
gives the user the freedom to perfectly match his real application,
from simple to sophisticated applications
keeps away complexity ( see what you need )

The availability of different AT for one device-type
the user starts the engineering from a basis very close to his real
application
reduces engi neering efforts

The user can save the AC as a new AT (step 2 feature)

S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Application Template
Engineering work flow
1. When adding a device to the DIGSI 5-project, the user selects the application
template that fits best to the real application
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Device 7SA84 / Application Basic
FG Line
E.g. the device type distance protection 7SA84 will provide the following 4 application
templates:
DIGSI 5
7SA84 Application templates:
Basic
MV cable, comp./isol.
MV overhead line, comp./isol.
HV overhead line, earthed
line
busbar
21
FL
51 51N 50
FFM
FG CB
trip
MP-I
MP-U
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Application template / configuration
1. When adding a device to the DIGSI 5-project, the user selects the
application template that fits best to the real application
2. The user adopts the functional scope to his real application
70% case: by adding or removing functions and/or stages
30% case: by adding FGs, MPs (and FNs) and their inter-connection as
well as to the routing to the process
3. The user routes all signals regarding physical/logical sources/destinations
4. If required: - Creating CFC-charts - Editing the default display
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Application configuration
Engineering Work Flow: Altering the functional scope -> add FN
Copy (drag & drop) the function from the library into the FG
Library-structure and device-functional structure are identical
If you know one answer you know both
If you dont know it you look in the manual: there the position is given
Hm? Where do I find the function
in the LIB and to where do I have
to copy it?
to copy it?
Add the function 3-ph undervoltage protection (27)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
AT Overhead line
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
AT 1.5 CB
QA
QA
QA
T2.2
T1.1
T5
T15
Tapped
LINE
BB 1
BB 2
T1.2
T2.1
T2.2
T1.1
T1.1
T2.2
QB91
QB92
T16
U4
U1
U2
U3
U4
I1
I2
I3
I4
MU-U (6)
1phase
MU-I (3)
3phase
MU-U (4)
3phase
FG Line
3 I
3 U
1 I
PD I
FG CB A-QA
3 I
1 U
IF IF
serial
interface 1
21
87
51
78 50BF
25
79
Int.Lk
Ctrl
BI
BO
to
CB A- QA
FL
I1
I2
I3
I4
MU-I (5)
3phase
U1
U2
MU-U (1)
3phase
serial
interface 2
MN (+)
87Stub
FG CB B-QA
3 I
IF
50BF
25
79
Int.Lk
Ctrl
BI
BO
to
CB B- QA
3 U IF 27 59 81
FG 3phase voltage
Supervison of busvoltage and frequency
7SL86 or 7SL87
A-
B-
C-
3 U
1 U
3 U
U3
MU-U (2)
1phase
59 27
59N
81
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
07 Order Configurator and Function Points
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
About the SIPROTEC 5 Order Configurator
How to configure the modular IEDs
Modularity as major contribution to the perfectly tailored fitof a device
Where to place orders
How to select the IEDs functionality
The relevance of Function Points
You will learn
Training objective
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Product Code
Order configurator
Integration in the IT Systems
Function-points and function-
points calculator
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Factory Supply
Function Upgrade
Components
Devices
7SA84 7SD86
7SL87
Factory The factory supplies
Fully assembled devices
with predefined main
functionality
Individual components
Function Upgrades
Software
Devices can be ordered
with every available
hardware configuration
without any additional
R&D effort
A WEB based order configurator provides the entire setup
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 designations with Product Codes
All configuration criteria are coded with a Long Product Code
The long product code can be interpreted directly.
Example:
7SL87-AAAA-AA0-0AAAA0-AA2111-12111A-DAA000-000AA0-CH1BA1-CF0
Each long product code has a one-to-one counterpart: a Short Product Code
Example: P1C321
The short product code is a sequential number, pointing on to one specific long
product code, i.e. one specific device configuration. Devices with the same short
product code have the same configuration and therefore the same long product code.
The short product codes are managed by a TNS Server (TNS=Technical Numbering
System).
S
p
e
c
i
a
l

a
p
p
r
o
v
a
l
s
I
n
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
o
f

r
e
-
o
r
d
e
r
e
d

f
i
r
m
w
a
r
e

v
e
r
s
i
o
n
W
a
r
r
a
n
t
y
C
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

p
a
r
a
m
.
E
n
c
r
y
p
t
i
o
n
F
c
t
.

P
o
i
n
t
s

c
l
a
s
s
S
i
g
n
i
f
i
c
a
n
t

f
e
a
t
u
r
e
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

v
o
l
t
.
H
o
u
s
i
n
g
K
e
y

s
w
i
t
c
h
L
E
D

q
u
a
n
t
i
t
y
D
i
s
p
l
a
y

t
y
p
e
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

p
a
n
e
l
F
r
o
n
t

d
e
s
i
g
n
I
n
t
.

E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t

P
o
r
t

J
P
o
r
t

E
B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
C
P
U

B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
P
o
r
t

M

C
B
2
0
2
P
o
r
t

N

C
B
2
0
2
P
o
r
t

P

C
B
2
0
2
I
/
O

b
o
a
r
d

i
n
B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

i
n
B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
M
o
d
u
l
e

a
t

t
h
e

1
s
t

e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
P
o
r
t

F
B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
?
How do we get the right product code?
Device
Type
Function point class
Key-operated Switch
Operation Panel
2nd expansion module
Additional Warranty
1st expansion module
Front Design
CT sensitivity
?..
?..
?..
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order configurator
Embedded in the Internet
7SA86
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order configurator
Embedded in Siemens SAP
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
7SA86
Order configurator
Embedded in the Internet and Siemens SAP
Identi cal Frame in both applicati ons
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Comprehensive Device Configuration
NASA-Factory
Product Code (ProC)
Devices DIGSI 5 Manufacturing
ProC ProC
Order configurator
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order configurator not only a WEB application
IT system for SIPROTEC 5 configuration
NASA-Factory
Spiridon-Sales CONCERT
Customer
external
KMAT: C2010
(URL)*
KMAT: C2010
(URL)*
KMAT: C2010
(URL +KB)*
PMD
(WEB)-Information
Configuration
Siemens
Region
Siemens
internal
NASA-Sales
TNS Server
(for Short Productcode)
KMAT: C2010
(URL)*
Configurable material (KMAT)
Configuration
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI)
* URL=Link to WEB-Configurator
* KB =Knowlege Base
Siemens Region
D and
Stammhaus
KMAT: C2010
(URL)*
PMI
Product Master
Integration
PMD
Product Master
Data
WEB Configurator
(Energy IPC)
IPC: Internet Pricing Configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator Start page
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator
Device Base functionality
Device type
Tooltip with detailed
information
Hardware standard
variants as recommendation
with I/O information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator
IED Functionality
Direct navigation between
the pages
The list of available
functions can be displayed
with the function-points
calculator
The device functionality
depends on the function-
points class of the device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Function-points calculator
Starting point is the Application Template
This function is always
available, without
additional points.
Application Templates for
this IED, available for each
IED in DIGSI
This function is
preselected twice within
the selected application
template, requiring 120
points in total
The first function is always
available (with 0 points),
the second would require
25 points
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
The result is the function-points class
The IED functionality depends on the selected function-points class
Scroll bar
Resulting function-points
class to be applied to the
configuration (and to the
Product Code).
Function-points sum for
this application (template).
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Applied function-points class
Applied function-points
class
As soon as the
background of Show
resultappears in dark-
grey a plausible device
configuration is available
With Nextgo to the next
page Modulesdisplaying
the I/O-configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator: Module and I/O view
Module overview
Add a module
Remove a module
Information about detailed
I/O summary
Terminal diagram
Resulting width in 19
fractions
Show result signals
plausible device
configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator: Detailed summary on the result page
Scroll bar
Export to PDF file
Product codes
Detailed summary
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Take aways / Call to Action
We supply fully assembled devices with predefined main functionality, even if the
customer has a specific hardware configuration
The devices are designated with a short product code, which is unique for a specific
device configuration. Each short product code has one corresponding unique long
product code
The device functionality depends on the function-points class of the device
The order configurator provides all SIPROTEC 5 configuration criteria. It is available
through the Siemens SAP Systems and the Internet
Thank you !
Perfectl y tailored fit Holistic workflow
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configurator
Intranet:
English Link: https://intranet.siemens.com/configuration/en
German Link: https://intranet.siemens.com/configuration/de
Spanish Link: https://intranet.siemens.com/configuration/es
Internet:
English:
Link:http://www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/automation/power-
transmission-distribution/protection/siprotec5/configurator.htm
German:
Link:http://www.energy.siemens.com/hq/de/automatisierung/
stromuebertragung-verteilung/schutz/siprotec5/bestellkonfigurator.htm
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
08 Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
Content
Content
Documentation Overview
Documents for Line Protection
Devices
Contents of System Catalog
Contents of Device Manuals
Document front cover
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 Documentation Overview
Others
Marketing Sales
SIPROTEC 5
Engineering
guide
Manuals
Device
Manuals
SIPROTEC 5
Communication
Protocols
Manuals
SIPROTEC 5
Operating
Manual
p
la
n
n
e
d

S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 Line Protection Devices
Device documentation
Device catal og
One document for all line protection devices 7SA8,
7SD8, 7SL8, 7VK8
Overall functional description
No technical data included link to the
manual/download area
Device manuals
One manual for Distance Protection
and Line Differential Protection for 3-pole tripping
7SA84, 7SD84, 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
One manual for Distance Protection,
Line Differential Protection and Breaker Management
for 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
System Catalog
Content
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
Device manuals
Content
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 System Discriptions
http://www.siemens.com/siprotec5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
09 DIGSI 5 - Overview
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Understand the key concepts and key features of DIGSI 5
Know how to handle DIGSI 5
Get an overview of the tools and editors
You will learn
Learning Target
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Key concepts of DIGSI 5
Variants and Licensing
Overview of DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Design
- Application
- Specification
Holistic
Workflow
Operations
- Documentation
- Test
- Maintenance
Implementation
- Device selection
- Parameterization
- Engineering
- Settings
Commissioning
- Test
- Documentation
Online-
Configurator
DIGSI 5
Holistic Workflow
Consistent tools from design to operations
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 One application for everything
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 5
One single tool from plant design to operation covering all
departments saves time, provides data security and
transparency along the entire life cycle of your plant.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5
One application
No duplicate data
No synchronization
problems
No save to continue
No application
switches
No separate System
Configurator
One global save,
export, print
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
System engineering Device engineering
Holistic Workflow -
From system design to project solution
System specification
Device specification
Device confi guration
System confi guration
Device programming
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Holistic Workflow -
Device programming
DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Holistic Workflow -
Device programming
Device engineering &
System engineering
System design also from top-down
(Single-Line)
Intuitive configuration of the system
functions
Template support for all operation
levels
Finalize programming and
download to target devices
DIGSI 5
System and device engi neering with one tool
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of DIGSI 5
Main area
All
editors
Project Tree
Offline configurations
Online accessible devices
Libraries
Add everything
from here
Properties
Propertie
s
Informati
on
Window bar
Open editors
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of the editors
Editor specific toolbar
Switch between
different views of
editor
Control window
Close
Dock/Undock
Minimize
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Typical
workflow
Design and
Implementation
One tree following offline workflow
Define topology
Add devices
Define functionality
Adjust settings
Define communication
Create and test logic
Download settings
These steps
needs
customer
attention
The project view guides you through your entire workflow
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Commissioning
and Operations
One tree following online workflow
Test device and plant
Test wiring and loop
Test analog inputs
Test control functions
Test circuit-breaker
Test protection functions
Test communication
Handle fault records, logs
Check measurements
Control Circuit-breaker
Typical
workflow
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 4 where to find what
Offline Direct
Substation
One device
Offline
Configuration
Change in a copy of
current device
configuration and store
changes into device
All Devices
Project
Select access mode
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Can be accessed in parallel:
- As Offline Configuration
- Online: Changes are done in a copy
of current device configuration and
can be stored into device
Represented by one project
All devices
Substation
Online and offli ne devices without applicati on switches
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Templates
When creating devices application templates provide default device
configurations for most common cases
Templates are also available e.g. for single-lines to create bays
Drag template
from l ibrary
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Copy & Paste
Copy
Devices
Function groups, functions, function blocks
CFC charts, blocks
Communication channels e.g. to redundant channels
Single-line symbols
...
Paste
Into new device,
new project
Single-lines in displays
...
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Scope of operations
Many operations can be used on multiple levels:
Export
Import
Print
Load settings
Load firmware
Level depends on the selection in project tree:
Project level
Device level
Editor level
Project level
Device level
Editor level
2 1
Select in
project tree
Execute
function
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Import / Export
Device-related formats
I E TEAX Open device exchange format for single/multiple device(s) (powered by TEAX)
I E DEX5 Complete information of single device
I E DSP5 Display pages of single device (including custom symbols)
E RIO Export of settings to Omicron Test Universe
I ELCAD topology information from ELCAD
I CFC Continuous function chart plans from V4 (import only)
E CSV All logs and protocols as comma-separated value files
E BMP, J PG Pictures of a tripping characteristics and zone diagrams
IEC 61850 data formats
I E SCD Substation Configuration Description
I E SSD - System Specification Description
I E SED System Exchange Description
I E ICD / CID IED Capability Description / Configured IED Description (ICD with communication)
I E IID Instantiated IED Description
E MICS Model Implementation Conformance Statement (Export only)
Protocol-related data formats
E IEC 60870-5-103 protocol settings for SICAM PAS
E DIGDNP DNP3 protocol settings for SICAM PAS
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Import / Export common use cases
Preconfigured device templates
Use DEX5 format to save and reuse whole devices as templates including
settings, routings, CFC logic, displays etc.
Backup
Use DEX5 format to store device regularly in backup archive and restore
backups after device replacement
External creation of settings/routings
Create new device and import TEAX file with externally created informations
Create file from DEX5 format and specify variancethrough TEAX
Export information for usage in other products
Use DEX5 format to provide information to other tools (e.g. documentation)
Sharing workload in teams
Work in parallel on copies of a project (one specify function settings, one
routings, one system interface settings) and merge in one project using
TEAX format
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
?
IEC 61850 simply usable
VLAN ID?
Report control Block?
Prefix and suffix?
FC or DA?
LNInst?
!
VLAN ID!
Report control Block!
Prefix and suffix!
FC or DA!
LNInst!
Normal User
IEC 61850 Expert
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
The implementation of IEC 61850 edition 2 unfolds the entire
potenti al of this standard by optimally supporting your operati on
needs and making handl ing easy.
IEC 61850 Expert
Isnt familiar with the
standard (or the terms
used there)
Doesnt care about details
Simply wants to use
signals from other devices
Wants to get commu-
nication done quickly
Normal User
Knows the standard well
Exactly knows how he
wants to get things done
in IEC 61850
Wants to have access to
all details
Wants all the flexibility the
standard provides
Needs edition 2
extensions
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Translation of the IEC 61850 data models complexity into your familiar user
language
Full compatibility and interoperability with edition 1 allows an integration of
existing solutions as well the usage of all features of IEC 61850 edition 2. J ust
choose your scenario.
Flexible object modeling, flexible object address allocation and flexible
communication services guarantee highest interoperability and cost-effective
exchange and expansion concepts
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
IEC 61850 simply usable Flexible Engineering
Protection and field devices
Control Center
IEC 61850 Station Bus
Operator station
Primary technology
Goose A
Report A
Report A
Task:
Exchange device of other
vendor with minimum effect
on the operations
Station Unit
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Engineering effort by different object addressing schemes
Goose S
Report S
Report S
Control Center
Operator station
Primary technology
Result:
High engineering- and test
effort for all communication
partners
Station Unit
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Flexible IEC 61850 object addressing schemes reduce effort
Station Unit
Goose A
Report A
Report A
Control Center
Operator station
Primary technology
Result:
Minimal engineering- and test
effort through flexible adoption
of the object addressing
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Overview of DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 4 to 5
DIGSI 4
Basic
DIGSI 4
Professional
DIGSI 4
Professional
+ IEC 61850
DIGSI 5
Compact
DIGSI 5
Standard
DIGSI 5
Premium
Features
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 - Variants overview
DIGSI 5
Compact
DIGSI 5
Standard
DIGSI 5
Premium
Single device handling
No IEC 61850
No Topology
No Test Support
Restricted online supp.
Free of charge
Compact
Multi Device handling
Advanced IEC 61850
(Flexible Engineering)
ELCAD Support
Test Sequences
CFC Debugging
SIGRA included
Premium
Multi device handling
IEC 61850
Single Line/Topology
Test Support
Online access of data
for multiple devices
Standard
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 - License Model
1 key allowed on up
to 10 computers
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 5
Buy 1, 5 or 10 licenses
Restricts usage to computers
Memory Stick with licenses
Needed for installation
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 - Choose what you need
Compact
Standard
Premium
Single License
Trial
Copy and use DIGSI 5 Compact
on as many computers as you
want
Scientific/Sales*
*: Restricted by area of usage
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 - Option Packages
Compact
Standard
Premium
SIGRA
SIGRA
always
included
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
New versions of DIGSI 5 - Download for free
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 5
Each new version of DIGSI 4 is
automatically shipped to all
customers who bought DIGSI 4
Customers can download for free
the update to latest DIGSI 5 from
www.siemens.com/energy
Customers can order a DVD with
latest version
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 in company networks
Provide DIGSI 5 installation on an intranet site for installation
Deploy the DIGSI 5 licenses on a central server
Use the network functionalities of the Automation License Manager to
push the licenses to the computers that work with DIGSI 5
or let them pull the licenses to their machine
Keep track of who took a license or gave it back using the protocol
functionality of the Automation License Manager.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Overview of DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Visually define your primary topology in single lines
Define your topology
Import an ELCAD or SCD file
Use templates/elements
Tailor functionality of protection
devices to fit your needs
Set basic data on the primary
equipment
Easy and intuitive graphical linkage
of the device with the primary plant
Automatically create display pictures
Integrated and consistent engi neering for system and device
from si ngle line diagram up to device parameterization
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Take over the device configuration into DIGSI 5
DIGSI 5 recognizes the
individual configuration through
product code
Graphical representation of
front and back
Add new communication
modules and terminals
Specify communication
protocols for each port
Give IOs, LEDs and F-Keys
user defined labels
O
r
d
e
r

C
o
d
e
Order Configurator
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Intuitive Routing and allocation
Better overview by two
separated matrixes for:
Information routing
Communication mapping
Powerful filtering and profiles
reduce show information as
needed
Show condensed or long
version of all columns you
need
Multi-Operation as in Excel
Use signals of other devices
via IEC 61850 as simple as
local signals
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Ensure plant safety with visual function chart (CFC) logic
IEC 61131 compliant function
blocks (CFC)
Intuitive guidance to find the right
priority level for your chart
Directly use signals without
markingthem first in the matrix
Use signals of other devices via
IEC 61850 as simple as local
signals
Reuse charts and groups of
blocks in other projects
Import DIGSI 4 charts
Offline tracing and analysis of
function charts using Test
Sequences
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Setting the parameters of the device
Simple and consistent editing
of settings
Display a settings group for
comparison and see differ-
ences sync the settings if
you like
Easily find and change
inconsistent settings
Change settings online
without device reset
Visual display of tripping
characteristics and zones
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
DIGSI 5 test suite for commissioning support
Integrated Test Suite adopted to
commissioning workflow
Start with test of physical connections
Test communication and analyze
communication channels through
detailed diagnostic views
Functional testing
Stimulate inputs for testing
Use external test equipment
Create test sequences and replay them
in the device without the need of
expensive external equipment
Always keep track of your process data and
indications and store important snapshots for
later analysis in your offline parameterization
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
10 DIGSI 5 - Configure
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Learn how to configure a SIPROTEC 5 device
Learn how to work with the editors needed for configuration
Get familiar with the workflow of the editors
You will learn
Learning Target
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
How to handle DIGSI 5
Working with Single Lines
Adding devices to the project
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
Extensibility by function charts
Create Display pages
Configure the communication
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing DIGSI 5
There is one installation routine for all
DIGSI 5 editions and languages
The functionality available does not depend on
what you install
But it depends on the license key you specify later
Upgrading to a more feature-rich DIGSI 5 edition just means
providing a new license key
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing DIGSI 5
Run setup.exe from the DIGSI 5 setup
You can choose the language of the installation
Setup installs all available languages of DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing DIGSI 5
Choose location where to install DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Three ways of starting DIGSI 5
OR
Choose in Start menu:
Siemens Energy
DIGSI 5 V1.00
DIGSI 5 V1.00
OR
(Double) Click on
DIGSI 5.exe:
DIGSI 5.exe
OR
(Double) Click on a
DIGSI 5 project:
Myproject.d5v1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Starting DIGSI 5...
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing your license(s)
After starting DIGSI
5 you have the
choice
Run DIGSI 5 as
Compact edition
Install a license
for DIGSI 5
Standard or
Premium
Start DIGSI 5 in
Trial mode
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing your license(s) using license manager
Install license(s)
From USB-stick
From other computers
You can store multiple
licenses on your computer
and
Move them to other
machines on the
network
Let other machines
grab them from that
machine
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI Device Drivers
DIGSI 5 device drivers and firmware updates are all packaged
in so called
DIGSI device drivers (DDD)
Container for transport of all loadable components to the user.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Excursion
How to read DDD names
Example:
7SA85 FW-V01.02 CFG-V01.01 DDD-V01.00
Device type Firmware Configuration DDD version
version version (continuous counter incr.
when FW or CFG changes)
Definition of version:
Vvv.xy
Major Release
Minor Release
Maintenance Release
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
2
Importing device drivers
Import the device drivers you need: ToolsImport device drivers
1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Create or open a project
Create project using:
File New
Or open an existing one
File Open
Or choose one of the
previously opened projects
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working with Single-Lines
Three ways of creating single-lines
OR
Import from file:
ELCAD files
From Topologies
TEAX
SCD, SSD
OR
Use templates from
library:
OR
Build it yourself using
The symbol library:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Switching between standards
Choose OptionsSettings and select the DIGSIpage to toggle standard
The standard can be even changed on existing single-line diagrams
Select standard before creating display pages from single lines
3 3
bV akV
OR
IEC ANSI
?
3 3
bV akV
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Example 1: Create using templates from library
Start single-line editor with
double click on Single-line
configurationin project
tree.
Drag and drop template
from library to editor
Drag template
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working with Single-Lines (IEC)
Drag template
From library
To extend busbar with new
bays, drop templates over
existing busbars
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
existing busbars
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Drag and drop elements
Elements get automatically
connected if dropped close
to bottom of other element
Rename elements
Example 2: Create using symbols from library
Drag element
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Bays are created
automatically
When dropping in existing
bay it gets extended,
otherwise a new bay is
created
Manually connect
elements by selecting one
connection point and
dragging to other
Drag element
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Set basic primary equipment data
Select primary equipment
like voltage and current
transformers in SLE
Set their basic settings
(e.g. ratios) in their
properties
After you added and
connected a device you
can take over those
settings to all connected
device (more details
coming in some slides)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Add new device
OR
Create device by product code:
Choose Add new device in
project tree
Specify short or long product
code
Choose Application template
that fits best
OR
Use Devices & Networks editor:
Choose device in library
Drag and drop Application
template from library to editor
In Devices & Networks editor (device view)
Add front panels
Add communication modules
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Add new device using product code
Add new device by clicking
Add new devicein project
tree.
Copy product code (long or
short) from the order
configurator or device label
If short product code is not
recognized DIGSI 5 tries to
update list of short product
codes from the internet
Significant features of your
device are displays
Select application template
that fits best your needs
(you can later add and
remove functionality as
needed)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of an Protection Application
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
SI=serial interface, PDC=protection data com.
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basic
I - 3 ph
U- 3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
connection between FGs and FG <->MP,
configurable via DIGSI
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U- 1 ph S 1
U- 1 ph S 2
I - 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U- 3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int . lk
CB
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basi c
I -3 ph
U-3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U-1 ph S 1
U-1 ph S 2
I- 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U-3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int. lk
CB
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basi c
I -3 ph
U-3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U-1 ph S 1
U-1 ph S 2
I- 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U-3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int. lk
CB
Preparation phase (not needed for application templates)
Connect the physical current and voltage terminals with the
logical measuring points in the Measuring-point routing
editor.
Connect measuring-points to function groups and
functions groups underneath each other in the
Function-group connections editor.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
You can connect measuring points to function
groups in two ways
In function-group connections editor
In Single-line configuration editor
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
To add functionality drag
function groups, functions
and function blocks from
library to device in SLE
(or to project tree)
Or copy existing
(parameterized) elements
and paste them
Rename elements
Select elements and delete
them if not needed
(context menu)
Tips:
Change setting in
properties of elements
Add comments
Define the functionality of the device
Drag FG, FN, FB
from l ibrary
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basi c
I -3 ph
U-3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U-1 ph S 1
U-1 ph S 2
I- 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U-3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int. lk
CB
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basi c
I -3 ph
U-3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U-1 ph S 1
U-1 ph S 2
I- 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U-3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int. lk
CB
Primary equipment connections
Connect the primary equipment with measuring points in
the Single-line configuration editor
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Connect device and primary equipment
Connect voltage and
current transformers to
function groups in devices
Connect Trip signal of
switching groups to
switching equipment in
bay, e.g. to visually
indicate which CB is
operated
Manually shift connections
if the automatic layout is
not sufficient
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Synchronize primary settings with device
If you have specified the
primary equipment settings
before, then you want to
synchronize them now with
the connected devices
Select a device to synchronize
Hit Synchronizebutton to
update device settings with
the settings of the primary
equipment.
This is a manual process to
avoid accidental overriding of
settings.
Therefore inconsistencies will
be shown by a red border of
the bay if one side changes
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Using the topology view
Switch to Topology tree
view using the tab selector
See and check the
connections between
function groups and
primary equipment
Change names for primary
equipment, also fr sub
station and voltage level
Add and review comments
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Add devices in network view
Start Devices & Networks
editor with double click on
Devices & Networksin
project tree.
You can also directly open
the Device view by double
clicking on Hardware &
Protocolsunder a device
You need the Hardware
catalog to add devices and
hardware extensions
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
hardware extensions
Drag and drop devices
from Hardware catalog to
editor
Select appropriate
application template
in the automatically
shown dialog
Drag device
from Hardware
catalog
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Modify hardware of device
Switch to Device view
by either double
clicking on a device in
Network view
Or by changing the
view selector to
Device viewand
selecting a device in
the toolbar
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Selecting elements in the
Hardware catalog shows
details in the window in the
lower right-hand corner
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Modify hardware in Device view
Add/Modify
Current terminals
Communication
modules
Front panels
To do so
Double click on
hardware extension
places them in first
available slot
Drag & Drop elements
from Hardware catalog
to empty slot
Drag elements
from Hardware
catalog
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Modify hardware and specify settings in Device view
By selecting a hardware
element (terminal block,
communication
module/port, front panel
you can specify settings
Select module and specify
settings and labels for
binary IO
Select terminal block and
specify meaningful labels
Select front panel and
for LEDs and F-Keys
Select communication port
to specify protocols and
protocol settings
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Specify communication settings
Select the communication
port you want to set up
E.g. for Ethernet modules,
set the properties on page
Ethernet addresses:
IP adress
Subnet connection
Create new subnet

S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Specify communication protocol
set the protocols supported
channel by channel on
page Channel x settings:
Network protocols
Communication
protocols
Settings of the
protocols on subpages
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Add devices to subnets visually
As mentioned: In the
properties of each
communication port one
can set the subnet the
device is connected to
But: You can also do it
visually
by connecting the ports
to an existing network
By connection ports of
multiple devices to
create a new subnet
Specify a meaningful
subnet name
See properties of subnet
for a bandwidth estimation.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Device information the business card of the device
Bild von DI -> Erste seite
Basic information about the
device
Type
Serial number of
connected online device
Possibility to upgrade device
parameter set
If your device has several
Ethernet interfaces you need
to specify which one is used
for connecting with DIGSI 5.
(see DIGSI 5: Details -
Prepare and establish
connection to the device(s)
Select language of the device
display
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Device information - Resource consumption
Overview over vital
resources used in the
device
Processor load: If too
many elements are
added that cant be
handled by the device
a list of categories
helps reducing load
Used and available
function points
Used CFC ticks and
critical block types
Use Refreshbutton to
update display when
keeping editor open
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Navigate to settings and extend functionality
Open Settings editor by
selecting a function in
project tree and double
click on that
Navigate through functions
using toolbar buttons
You can easily add function
blocks of same type using
buttons
Delete stages using
buttons if they are not fixed
part of the default
configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Change settings
Select setting group for
change
Available, if multiple
setting groups exist
Change settings
Invalid settings are
displayed with red
background
Check tooltips for valid
ranges
Use arrows beneath
input field to change
value to next valid one
Some settings dont belong
to all setting groups. They
are indicated by icon
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Identify settings by unique number
Turn unique setting
numbers on e.g. to easier
communication with
colleagues
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Compare setting groups
To compare two settings
group just select the
comparison group
Compare values
Differences are
indicated by icon
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Synchronize setting groups
Select a function block by
clicking into gray area
Choose Synchronize
This copies setting values
of the function block from
the comparison group to
setting group for change
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Check diagrams that vi sualize settings
Many setting groups
contain graphical
representation of stages
and tripping characteristics
Diagram automatically
adjusts to setting changes
Select stages to be shown
in key of diagram
Zoom in and out
Use mouse cursor in the
diagram to get the values
at certain points
Save picture of diagram or
copy to clipboard for usage
in documentation tools
Print directly from editor
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Setting group handling
Open Settings >Device
Settings in project tree
Or directly jump from
settings editor using the
toolbar buttons:
Change number of setting
groups
Copy settings of a setting
group to another one
Change active setting
group
Choose setting group
Choose selection
criterion
Change edit mode
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Change settings wherever you see function blocks
You can also change
settings wherever you see
functions
E.g. in Single-line
configuration
Select function block
Open Properties area
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Different tasks different editors
All mappings to protocols
Information routing
All routings (except to protocols)
DIGSI 4
Masking I/O
(Configuration
matrix)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Information routing Editor
Open Information
routing Editor by double
clicking on Information
routingin project tree
Editor is best viewed in
Maximize mode
Rows display signals
and cols possible
routing sources and
destinations.
Stars indicate that
collapsed rows contain
data
Right click on cell to
show possible values
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Short and long display mode
Double clicking on a
column header toggles
between short and long
column mode
Choose per column
what column mode to
use
Use toolbar buttons to
toggle all columns
Short display mode
group e.g. all BIs
Long: U
Short: U3, L5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Manage information overload
Showing everything means
a lot to read
Use scenario based filters
by selecting appropriate
view in drop down list in
toolbar
Use column filters to
restrict displayed infor-
mation
Show only signals
containing Pickup
Show only signals
routed to LED 1
Show only signals
routed to any BI
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Excursion
Filtering in grids
Filter column by selecting an existing
value:
Choose (Custom) for complex filters:
(does not) equal
(does not) begin/end with
(does not) contain
Remove all filters at once
This filtering functionalities are available in all grids
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Adding new signals and other functionality
Drag & drop from
Libraries to hierarchy in
Information routing
FG, FN, FB
User-defined
function block
New signals in
function blocks
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Rename everything
Rename all FG,FN,FB
as well as signals
Regardless if system- or
user defined ones
Rename in tree
Or rename in properties
Here you see also
the original name
Elements used in
IEC 61850 have an
additional name and
path
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Comment everything
Inspection remarks
What needs to be done
When to review or
inspect next time
Not only in Information
routing but in all editors
and for all elements:
Add comments to
each element in
Properties tab >
User Information
Those comments are
saved and exported
to TEAX
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Change settings quickly
Select function blocks
(like stages)
Settings are displayed
in properties page
Settings
Only for active setting
group and selected edit
mode (prim, sec. %)
Change in device
information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Change hardware settings of I/O in Information routing
Select columns of LEDs,
BI, BO, K-Keys
Change settings like
color, user label in
properties page
Settings
Only works in long
column mode
Observe tooltip of BIs,
BOs, LEDs
They contain location
information
User defined labels
(check excursion)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Excursion
User labels makes it easy to find the right things
In Hardware & Protocols editor: Select housing
Specify user labels for
LEDs
Function keys
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
Current and
voltage terminals
Also available are other
hardware related settings
LED color
Threshold of BIs
All editors working with those elements display user comments
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Reuse
Copy and paste
Function groups, functions, function blocks, signals
Selected areas in grid to other place in grid
Selected columns in grid to other columns
Selected rows, full grid or selected areas of grid to Excel
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
Create Display pictures
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Extensibility by function charts (CFC)
Create a function chart
Add new chart by double
clicking on Add new chart
underneath Function
chartsin project tree.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Select a name for the chart
Select the CFC task
A detailed explanation
helps you to select the
right task.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overcoming the great void of charts
CFC charts are compatible
to IEC 61131
Conversion between
simple data types happen
automatically
This simplifies charts a
lot
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Add content to your function chart
OR
Reuse charts or blocks:
Import charts from DIGSI 4
Copy charts from other
devices and projects in DIGSI 5
Copy blocks (rubberband-
selection with mouse) and
paste (keeps connections)
OR
Build it yourself using the block
library:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Manually add and connect function blocks
Select an element in library
Drag element from library
to editor
Connect blocks by clicking
on port and drag to other
port
Add constants by selecting
input and typing value
paste
includes connections
Drag element
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Connect with signals
Choose signal in Signals
task card
Drag signal from library to
inputs / outputs
Use the filters of Signal
task card to filter for your
wanted data type (show
me only measured values
(MV))
Choose if you want to see
signals as well-known
margins or flags
Drag signal to input or output
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Extendable blocks
Some blocks show a green
triangle on bottom
Those can be extended by
the number of inputs
Open properties of the
block
Choose page I/Os
Enable display of
additional inputs
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Control flow
Get a good overview over
all connections between
blocks
Change static values of the
inputs easily
Add new blocks here as
well
Connect inputs by with
signals from the Signal
task card via drag & drop
See tracing values while
CFC Tracing and Watching
is activated in a table form
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Resource consumption of function charts
Open Device information
by double clicking on
Device informationin
project tree.
Select tab Resource
consumption
Validate resource
consumption of function
charts
When a limit is exceeded
then an inconsistency
warning indicates that
Hit refresh when keeping
editor open and updated
list shall be provided
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust parameters
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Create display pages
Three ways of creating pages
OR
Create from singe-line:
Select bay or
device and create
displays
Copy elements and
paste in displays
OR
Use existing ones:
OR
the symbol library:
Import from file
Use the ones in
application templ.
Copy from other
device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
The manual approach
Choose desired symbol
standard (ANSI or IEC) at
OptionsSet Standard
to editor
Draw lines between
elements by clicking on
port and drag to other port
Add texts with text tool in
toolbar
Add measured values or
dynamic texts with tool in
toolbar
Rotate elements as
needed
Drag element
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Display page properties
Reorder pages by
drag&dropin project tree
order shown in DIGSI 5
will same as in device
Select default page in
properties
Change name in headline,
properties or project tree
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Elements with (no) signals
assigned are indicated in
different colors
task card
symbols or measured
value fields
(MV))
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
If you have IEC 61850
enabled you can drag
signals of other devices in
the same subnet from
library to symbols or
measured value fields
GOOSE connections are
created automatically
Drag single or double point
indications or measured
values on an empty place
in display to create
dynamic text fields
automatically
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Default controllable symbol
All display pages are
control pages
Select default element in
properties of symbol
Will be selected by
default if hitting control
key on device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Create custom symbol
Create new symbol using
tool from toolbar
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Symbol editor: Create new symbol
Choose width and height
Choose static or dynamic
symbol
Select default state
Add or move red bullets
who indicate ports for
connections
Draw symbol using the
provided drawing tools
Closed shapes can be
filled
Move or resize parts using
the mouse cursor tool
Hit OK on bottom to take
over symbol to display
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Symbol editor: Reuse symbols
Drag & Drop symbol from
library to that as starting
point
Symbol in library is not
changed
Select parts or full symbol
in one state and copy to
other states
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Fault display editor
Specify information
displayed on device
display in case of faults
Choose for each line what
information to display
Select the circuit breaker
to show the fault displays
for
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust parameters
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Extend device functionality
Measuring-point routing
All measuring points
coming by application
templates are ready for
use
Add new measuring points
(1 or 3 phase)
Added measuring points
need to be connected to
physical terminals
Select which measuring
point inputs to which
function group
Connect interfaces
between function groups
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Function-group interactions
Application templates:
Measuring points are pre-connected
with function group interfaces.
New function groups added from the
library:
The connection between measuring
points and function group interfaces
needs to be defined by the user.
Voltage 1-phase <none>
Current 3-phase <none>
Circuit Breaker 1
Line Current 3-phrase CT 3-phase 1
Voltage 3-phase VT 3-phase 1
Line 1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
All Function groups coming
by application templates
are ready for use
Added Function groups
Measuring points
Circuit-breaker groups
Other function groups
Protection function
groups
function group
Connect interfaces
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Current 3-phase CT 3-phase 1
Circuit Breaker 1
Line Current 3-phase CT 3-phase 1
Line 1
These connections (measuring point / function group interface) are shown in
Single-line configurations editor
Function group connections editor
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
11 DIGSI 5 - Control Functions
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
How the control function is designed in SIPROTEC 5
To understand the basic principles for user defined functions
Where the differences are compared to SIPROTEC 4
How to use DIGSI 5 for these purposes
How the SIPROTEC 5 devices work in a Substation Automation
Environment
What you will learn
Training Objective
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
Structure of Control Function
Description of Details
Differences to SIPROTEC 4
User defined signals
(Presentation with DIGSI 5)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Introduction
Device architecture is based on IEC 61850 model
IEC 61850 is thesubstation automation protocol
Goals:
Full integration of protection and substation automation
Full support of IEC 61850 edition 2
Satisfy customers with high level IEC 61850 requirements
(flexible engineering)
Less engineering effort for standard engineering tasks
Do not bother customers with IEC 61850 details if they dont need it
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of control function
Parameter (settings):
Command type,
SW-Filter time,
Feedback monitoring time,
SBO timeout
Evaluation of:
Switching authority(local/remote)
Switching mode (interlocked/uninterlocked)
Interlocking conditions
Double operation blocking
Blocking by protection
Parameter:
Interlocking Conditions
(engineered in CFC)
Parameter: (settings)
Output time
Chatter blocking
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Representation of Control Structure in DIGSI 5
Example 1: Circuit Breaker
XCBR
CSWI
CILO
Representation of CB in routing matrix
New: Circuit Breaker includes protection function blocks
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Example 2: Disconnector
CSWI
CILO
XSWI
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Engineering Basic Definitions
Function Blocks Settings
Signals Properties
Function
Block
Function
Group
Signal
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Representation of Control Structur in DIGSI 5
Details of Circuit Breaker (1/2)
Control Commandfor CB
Select logging options (for example
event log)
For transmission to system interface
Possibilityfor external aquisition
blocking (Knebelschalter)
Use these signals for outputs of
interlocking CFC plans
Physical position as connected to
binary inputs and outputs of device
For use in interlockingconditions
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Position
Connect to binaryinputs
Use this information in interlocking
CFC plans or to connect to LEDs
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Single Line and Topology View
Topologytree is
read-only in step 1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Main Differences to SIPROTEC 4
AutomaticGOOSE configuration
Protection and Control use the same Circuit Breaker model
Single Line Editor for system view
Topology Tree (read-only in first release)
Supports IEC61850 Edition 2
More details of IEC 61850 usable
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Signal Types (1/2)
What do I have to do if I need a.
Information type SPS (Single Point Status)
Protocol text or transient indication(Wischermeldung) is a
setting
No differentiation external / internal signal
Not necessary any longer
Circuit breaker or disconnect switch status only
SPS (if source =BI or CFC), SPC (if source =
Communication)
Communication)
Function Group / Block Transformer Tap Changer
Binary Counter Reading BCR
SIPROTEC 4 Information Catalog SIPROTEC 5 Library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Signal Types (2/2)
Circuit breaker or disconnector switch status only
Circuit breaker or disconnector switch
Contained in every function group line(Wp+, Wq+, Wp-,
Wq-)
Pulse metered value
Measured Value (result of CFC / GOOSE-Communication)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Grouping of signals in
User Defined Function Group (1/2)
User defined Functionblock for
grouping of information
Command with Single Feedback
Command with Double Feedback
Routing of single feedback to
binaryinput
Routing of double feedback to
binaryinputs
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Routing of commandoutput to relays
Same options for both types!
Off: Set relaywhen command is off
On: Set relaywhen command is on
Cc: Common contact; set relaywhen
command is offor on
BF: BusyFlag; set relaywhen
command is offor on, starting
with selectand endingwithend
of feedback monitoring time
All routings are allowed to be
multiple.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
Presentation with DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
What will be shown in DIGSI 5?
Select Single Line Template
Create circuit breaker and disconnect switch objects in the device
Connect switches and CTs / VTs in Single Line to device objects
Engineering of breaker and disconnect switch:
Connect to BI / BO
Create interlocking logic in CFC
Route position information to event log
Create Display Page from Single Line Editor picture
Use GOOSE messages for interlocking
Show complete settings and properties of switches (for example chatter
blocking, filter times)
Create new single point / double point indications
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5 /
12 DIGSI 5 - Online Connection to the device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Network configuration
Initialize the device
Establish a connection
Working online
Transmit configuration
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Set the IP address
Open the editor by
double clicking on
Devices and networks
in the project tree
The back view of the
devices with all interfaces
is visible in the Device
view
After selecting the
interface in the device
view, the IP address
can be set
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Network topology
The devices can be
added to one or more
subnets in the Network
view
Click on the correct
interface and add a
subnet
The interfaces of the
other devices can then
be connected to the
same subnet
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Why do we have to initialize?
The device has to be
initialized via the USB
interface, if you want to
download parameters
into the device for the
first time
The online device
receives its IP address
The offline configuration
in the project receives
the serial number (BM
number) of the
SIPROTEC relay
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
OR
Plug & Play
Find all devices in
the subnet
OR
direct connection from
offline parameter set
Try to reach a device
through USB or
Ethernet using given
communication
settings
Two ways to connect
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Direct connection Select the IP address
If the device has been
initialized already, you
can connect directly to
the device
Select the IP address
that shall be used to
connect to the device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Direct connection
Direct connection to a
SIPROTEC device from
the offline configuration
Right-click on the device
and select Connect to
device
A warning will appear, if
the serial number of the
online device and the
offline configuration
differs
If the device is not
already available in the
Lifelist (Online access),
it will appear under
Other accessible
devices
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Lifelist
The lifelist contains all
available online devices
See directly through
which interface the
devices are connected
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug & Play Find the devices
If the project does not
already contain the
device, DIGSI 5 can
search it for you
Select the network
interface that is
connected to the device
and click on Update
accessible devices
All online devices within
the local network will
appear in the lifelist
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Retrieve device data
Retrieve the device data in
two steps:
1) Basic device information
also suitable for slow
connections
2) Complete process data
Logs
Records
Expert
configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug & Play Copy a device to the project
A connected device can
directly be copied to a
project
Get the device data on
site without having the
original project
The online device can
be copied to the project
even if the configuration
already exists
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug & Play Update an existing offline configuration
An existing offline
configuration can be
updated with the
configuration of the
online device
Always keep your
project up-to-date
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug & Play Create an empty offline configuration
An empty offline
added to the project
The new configuration
has the same order
code as the online
device
The application
template can be chosen
independently of the
original online device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Exercise
1. Set the IP-address of the interface J
2. Initialize the device
3. Connect to the device
4. Retrieve the process data
5. Add an online device to your project through
plug & play
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Process data
Receive the process
data directly from your
The connection to the
online device will be
initiated directly
After the process data
has been downloaded,
the connection will be
disconnected
automatically
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Get the complete
process data at once
OR
Download individual
process data:
Logs
Records
Indication snapshots
Measurement
snapshots
Working online
Process data
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Online connection
An online connection is
identified by:
orange bar
magic eye
connection icon
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Online Device
Device information
Logs
Records
Indications
Measurements
Test Suite
Safety & Security
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Device Information
General device
information:
Name
Relay type (e.g. 7SL87)
Serial number
Configuration version
Product code
The device mode can be
changed:
Commissioning
Process
Simulation
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Device Information Time Information
Information regarding
time synchronization
Device time can be set
manually
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Device Information Hardware Information
General hardware
information
Information of each
hardware module
Information of each
communication module
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Logs
Operational log
Fault log
Setting-history log
2 User-defined logs
All log entries can be
deleted
Logs can be saved to a
file (e.g. csv)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Logs
Set the time reference
Sort the log entries
according to:
Time
Name
Value
Number
Quality
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Records
Find all fault records
Export the fault records
Save an overview of the
fault records to a file
Create test fault
records
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Indications
Indications are updated
continuously
Indications can be
saved as snapshots in
the offline configuration.
Indications can be
cleared
Save indications to a
file
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Measurement Values
Measurement values of
each function group
e.g. - Line
- Circuit Breaker
Operational values
Fundamentals
Symmetrical components
Min/Max values
Energy values
Statistics
User-defined values
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Measurement Values
Measurement
Snapshots are saved in
Change between
primary, secondary and
percentage values
Save snapshots to a file
(e.g. csv)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Test Suite
Verify the wiring
Diagnostic tools for the
Monitoring of analog
inputs
Test the control
functions
Test the circuit breaker
Check the correct
behavior of the
protection functions
Test your
communication
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Safety & Security
Safety
Confirmation IDs for
different safety-relevant
device operations
Security
Password for a secure
DIGSI connection
(NERC compliant)
Passwords and
confirmation IDs can be
changed individually for
each device
Passwords and
reset
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Information routing
Communication
mapping
Settings
FGs (e.g.
Line 1)
Power
System
Recording
Device settings
Time settings
Function charts (CFC)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Expert Configuration - Change settings
Choose the setting
group you want to
change
Click on Edit Settings
Change the settings
Load the changes to
the device or discard
them
Settings of two different
setting groups can be
compared
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Change the settings
in the matrix
Load the changes to
them
Working online
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Additional
functionality can be
ordered subsequently
Add more function
points to the device
Add significant
features (e.g.
additional ends for a
7SD)
You will receive a
daf-file that contains
the changes
This daf-file can be
imported into the
online device
Working online
Upgrade device functionality
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
To disconnect, right-
click on the online
device and select
Disconnect device
Working online
Disconnect
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Exercise
1. Check the measurement values and save
a snapshot
2. Check the log files
3. Change the settings in your online device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Load configuration
Load configuration to device(s)
Load the settings into
one device
numerous devices:
All available devices
will be listed
If a device is not
available, DIGSI will
skip this one and will
continue with the
next
one
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Select the device(s)
Load the configuration
Load configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Load the firmware
Load the complete firmware
Load the firmware into
numerous devices:
will be listed
If a device is not
continue with the
next
one
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Choose which relay(s)
you want to update
Set the firmware
version
Load the firmware
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
It is not necessary to
load the complete
firmware
Particular parts of the
firmware can be
selected:
Mainboardfirmware
Boot system of a
communication
interface

Mark the project and
click on Online->
Expert view
Select the required
parts and load the
firmware
Load the firmware
Expert view
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Exercise
1. Transmit the changed configuration into one
device
2. Load the complete firmware into two different
devices
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
13 DIGSI 5 - Expansion of function points
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Order Configurator
DIGSI Handling
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
Select SIPROTEC 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
Press Configure
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
Select Function extension
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
Fill in the device type, serial number, function point class and additional changes. Then select
the required mode of dispatch.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
After ordering this configuration you will get a file called *.daf.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Order Configurator
DIGSI Handling
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
DIGSI 5 How to load the file (.daf) into the device
The *.daf file is load into the device via DIGSI 5
Online help: Loading device functionality into
the SIPROTEC 5 device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Siemens Power Academy TD F00_Page 1
Do you want to become a
certified expert?
Learn more about our
Curriculum concept
Siemens Power Academy TD Curricula
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
A sustainable Competence Development Program
Expert
Advanced
Associate
What does the Curriculum consist of?
Training program of several courses on one
specific topic for a systematic competence
devolpment
The possibility to apply & be certified
in 3 different qualification levels
Associate Advanced Expert
Per Qualification Level: series of
aligned courses and associated e-tests
Certificate is valid for 5 years
Efficiently gaining knowledge
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Curricula consist of 3 qualification levels
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Benefits of Competence Development Program
Recruiters can aim at
certified applicants to
ensure adequate
capabilities of future
employees.
Participants can certify
their skills and know-
ledge to enhance their
professional market
value at home and
abroad.
Employers meet the
requirements of ISO 9001
as employees obtain
specialist knowledge and
skills through certification.
Benefit for the industry Benefit for participants Benefit for employers
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
How to obtain certification
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Substation Automation Systems
SICAM PAS Substation Automation
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC Protection
Planning Power Generation and Industry
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Please contact us
Power Academy TD
Humboldtstrasse 50
90459 Nuremberg
Phone: +49-911-433-7415
Fax: +49-911-433-5482
E-mail: poweracademy.ic-sg@siemens.com
Download areas:
SICAM www.sicam.de
SIPROTEC www.siprotec.com
Power Quality www.powerquality.de
Energy Customer Service:
in case of required technical support
www.siemens.com/energy-support
Hotline: +49-180-524-7000
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Siemens Power Academy TD Course Title F00_Page 1
SIPROTEC 5 / DIGSI 5 Basic i3D Intern (3 days)
Bruhnke (Winter), IC SG SE PTI PA
Lunch Lunch Lunch
13:00 16:30
Ex 11:
Display Power Flow and SF6 Lost
Ex 12a: Expansion of Function Points
13:00 17:00
Ex 05:
Implementation of Control Functions with DIGSI 5
Ex 06:
Design of SIP5 Display Pages with DIGSI 5
13:00 16:30
Presentation of Height Lights
SIP 5 Hardware Concept (Chap.3.1)
SIP 5 Communication Concept (Chap.3.2)
SIP 5 Software Concept (Chap.4)
Ex 07a:
Ex 07b:
Ex 07c:
Implementation of Protection Functions
(Overcurrent)
SIP 5 Function Groups & Application Templates (Chap.5)
Ex 3a :SIP 5 Device Orders No. with SIP 5 Online
Ex 3b SIP 5 Module Orders No. with SIP 5 Online
Day 3 Day 2 Day 1
9:00 12:00
Ex 08: Online Mode
Online Operation with SIPROTEC 5
Edit time and date
Monitoring of Log Lists
Reading of Fault Recorts
Saving of Process Data
Download of Settings with
Compare Devices
9:00 12:00
SIP 5 Documentations (Chap.7)
DIGSI 5
HW and SW performance
Installation (Chap.8.2)
License
Device Driver
9:00 12:00
Ex 1a:
SIPROTEC 5 Scope of Supply of 20kV Feeder
(Chap.1)
Ex 1b:
Basic Functions of SIPROTEC 5 (Teamwork)
(Chap.2)
Ex 2a:
Handling of SIPROTEC 5 (Teamwork)
Ex 2b:
Height lights of SIP 5 (Teamwork)
Ex 09:
Logic Function Charts (CFC)
Flashing LEDs
Ex 10:
Logic Function Charts (CFC) Setting Group
Changing
Ex 04a:
Design of 220 kV Feeder SLD with DIGSI 5
Ex 04b:
Design of SIP 5 Device with DIGSI 5
Group 1: HW Concept (Chap.3.1)
Group 2: Communication Concept (Chap.3.2)
Group 3: I/O , CT & VT Terminals (Chap.3.1)
Group 4: Dimensions of SIP 5 (Manual)
Preparation:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
01 Specification of 220 kV Feeder Protection and Automation
SIPROTEC 5 /
DIGSI 5 BASIC Course
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
=

D

0
1
3
~
5
0
H
z

2
2
0

k
V
1
0
0

k
m
2
2
0

k
V
:
-
B
A

1
1
2
2
0

k
V
:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
=

D

0
2
-
Q
C

1
1
-
Q
C

2
1
2
2
0

k
V
:
2
2
0

k
V
:
3
2
2
0

k
V
:
-
B
A

1
1
-
B
A

2
1
-
Q
B

1
1
-
Q
B

2
1
-
Q
C

1
-
Q
C

2
3
~
5
0
H
z

2
2
0

k
V
-
Q
A
1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
This specification covers the design of a HV substation protection system.
A combined distance and Two end differential protection relay (3 pol.) shall be provided to protect and control the OHL feeder =D01
and the Busbar Coupler =D02.
The devices should have 19 binary inputs, 12 Standard and 3 Fast binary outputs.
The protection device has to have 2 Voltage- and 2 Current-systems interfaces for Line 800/1 5P30 48 VA (Error 1%/ 5%)
and for BC 2500/1 5P30 40 VA (Error 1%/ 5%) (CT neutr. point not to objects). The 220 kV Network is insulated.
The device should be flexible enough to activate maximal additional protection functions at any time without changing the device and
without additional costs.
The interface for GOOSE communication should be separated from the differential protection interface.
The protection device should have a changeable FO-interface with dual ports, one channel for two end line differential protection
and one channel for existing Substation Automation System with IEC 60870-5-103.
For the communication to the new Substation Automation System and for Inter-device-GOOSE-communication should be use IEC
61 850 protocol. For IEC 61850 should be use a separate changeable electrical module with two canals and integrated Ethernet-
switch.
The protection devise should communicate over a separate Ethernet-interface for DIGSI 5.
The device should be flush mounting and provide local control functionality with a large display and key switches and should have
32 LEDs, 16 LEDs of those should be color changeable.
The power supply in the substation is 48 V DC.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5/
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Overview: Look from the outside
Types of IO-Modules
Rear view, Principle of terminal naming
Typical Devices
A closer look to the inside
Summary
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Wath are new ?
without problems
Customers can configure their individual device for
specific applications

S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Base Module with Expansion Modules
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Mounting of an expansion module
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Detailed view on module connections
Robust and stable
connection
between parts
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Different Types of Operator Panels for Base Module
Small Display Large Display
No Display
Dual Color
LEDs
(settable to
green or red)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Operator Panels for expansion modules
Without LED With LED With LED and key switches
Single
Color
LEDs
(red)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Surface mounted device front view
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Operating Elements
of HMI
Control of Switching Elements
Numerical Keys
and Function Keys
LED Acknowledge
and Reset of
latched
information
USB plug-in
Description Field
for LEDs
Description Field
for Function Keys
Cursor Keys
Key Switch S5
Remote/Local
Key Switch S1
Interlocking Off / Normal
Context Sensitive Keys
16 LEDs (red)
Description Field
for LEDs
Base Module
Expansion Module
16 LEDs (green or
red, selectable)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Change of Current Transformer
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Current Transformer is inside of Current Terminal
Current terminal
Voltage terminal
(for voltage measurement, BI, BO)
Current
transformer
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Change of modules
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5: Types of IO-Boards
Properties of IO-Boards
14 different IO boards have been designed to meet the requirements for
the possible applications.
Elements to be combined on the different IO boards:
Binary Inputs (with and without common potentials)
Relay: Relay Standard 9 ms (Make contact, normally open)
Relay Standard (Change over contact)
Relay Fast 6 ms (Make contact, normally open)
Relay Fast (Change over contact)
Power-Relay
High-Speed Relay 0,2 ms (semi-conductor speed-up)
Current Transducer Input (Protection or Measurement)
Voltage Transducer Input
Measurement transducer input (20mA)
Plug-In-Modules (Communication, 20mA Input, Memory,)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (1)
PS201
Life Contact
IO201
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (2)
IO202 IO203
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (3)
IO205 IO206
Variant of IO205
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (4)
IO207
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (5)
IO208 IO209
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Board Types (6)
IO214
Variant of IO202
CB202
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Label: Position
and type of IO
Battery
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Rear view, Principle of Terminal Naming
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Base Module with IO202
4xI, 4xU, 11BI, 8BO,
1 Life Contact
Basic protection relay for
directional measuring
Base Module with
IO208 and Extension
Module with IO202
8xI, 8xU, 15BI, 19BO,
1 Life Contact
Protection relay for two
measuring points
(1,5 circuit breaker method)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Base Module with
IO202 and Extension
Modules with IO202 and
3xIO207
4xI, 4xU, 67BI, 38BO,
1 Life Contact
Bay Controller for double
bus feeder with large
number of IO signals
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
PS201 IO20x IO20x
Local power bus 28V
1,5V
3,3V
5V
-5V
11V
Distributed Power Supply
for high availability and high
EMC resistance
Thermal load is distributed
All voltages are supervised
detailed diagnostic
Wide Range PS (24/48 V DC,
60-220V AC/DC)
24/48V range will not be
damaged if connected to
higher voltage
Highlights of Power Supply
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Cross-wiring of Current and
Voltage Groups to different
A/D Converters
Fast error detection for
A/D converters
A/D converter 24 Bit
(SIPROTEC4: 22 Bit)
better accuracy
Calibration factor on current
transformer terminal
EEPROM
C
u
r
r
e
n
t

C
l
a
m
p

8

p
o
l
.
I
U
5 Ranges
I
U
5 Ranges
I
U
5 Ranges
I
U
5 Ranges
A
D
4 channel
Sigma
Delta 1
U
U
V
o
l
t
a
g
e

C
l
a
m
p

1
4

p
o
l
.
U
U
U
U
U
U
A
D
4 channel
Sigma
Delta 2
Highlights of A/D sampling
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
without problems
Customers can configure their individual device for specific
applications
Devices without Jumpers no more opening
of device
1A/5A-rated current will be set electronically.
Three thresholds of binary inputs (15V, 71V, 154V) can be
set individually using software
Powerful signal processing
Sampling rate up to 16 kHz (protection 1kHz)
Maximum 40 analog channels (24 for protection)
Prepared for PMU functionality
Draw out of terminal blocks
Simple exchange of current transformers
Pre-Wiring is possible
Change to sensitive ground fault CT input is possible after
ordering
Service-friendly
Opening of device not necessary (battery, modules,can
be changed without opening)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
On-Site operation panel, visualization
9 freely configurable function keys
Option of small and large display for all devices
Up to 16 multicolor LEDs + the option of 4*16 red LEDs
IEC61508 Certification
Safety standard, certificate scheduled for step 2
all necessary developments are available in step 1
Memory module 8 GB (step 2)
For long-time fault records
For power quality data
Identical Wiring for panel-mounted and
surface-mounted device
Standardization saves time
Standardization prevents from errors
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
05 Software Components of the SIPROTEC 5 system
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
About the SIPROTEC 5 Software components
which components are available, compared to SIPROTEC 4
which components can be handled individually by the user
What you will learn
Training Objective
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
SIPROTEC 4 system
Legend:
component with own version in the user view;
component can be altered (loaded) individually
A SIPROTEC 4 device consists of the following major
components:
Device Parameter set (PS)
Both components are handled individually, meaning
that no 1:1 relation exists, but a n:m.
E.g. FW V4.80 is compatible to PS V4.73
The device functionality is defined by the firmware.
Therefore the firmware is the leading version in the
users' view.
(e.g. approvals usually refer to the FW version)
V4 device
Firmware (FW)
- operating system
autom. functions
- CFC blocks
- text font
Parameter set (PS)
- settings
- routing
- CFC charts
- graphic display
- (text pool)
com mapping
(text pool)
boot system
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
V4 device
Firmware (FW)
- operating system
autom. functions
- CFC blocks
- text font
Parameter set (PS)
- settings
- routing
- CFC charts
- graphic display
- (text pool)
com mapping
(text pool)
boot system
V5 device
Firmware (FW)
- operating system
- CFC block
Configuration (CFG)
autom. functions
- settings
- routing
- CFC charts
- graphic display
com. mapping
(text pool)
text font
boot system
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
SIPROTEC 5 system
A SIPROTEC 5 device consists of the following
two major components:
Device Configuration (CFG)
Both components are handled individually (n:m
relationship).
The device functionality is defined by the
firmware AND the configuration. Therefore the
firmware is no longer the one leading version in
the users view. It is FW and CFG version.
E.G. an approval must document both versions.
All other components can be changed
individually.
V5 device
Firmware (FW)
- operating system
- CFC block
Configuration (CFG)
autom. functions
- settings
- routing
- CFC charts
- graphic display
com. mapping
(text pool)
text font
boot system
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
There are some differences compared to SIPROTEC 4:
Two major components which define the device functionality and which must be
communicated when talking about device functionality
The DAF-file: This file defines the no. of function points which are allowed for the
device (and therefore define the possible no. of functions with cost)
More individually loadable components
Advantages:
Point 2 allows to upgrade the device functionality just by downloading a new DAF
file, without touching the actual application
Point 3 allows to remedy faults - if they are located in these components - without
touching the application, e.g. a text pool fault
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Software components
SIPROTEC 5 system
Further information:
All installable components are delivered and installed on the PC through the
DIGSI device driver(DDD-file)
how to install: refer to DIGSI lesson
No separate FW update toolused. All updates are carried out through
DIGSI.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
About the SIPROTEC 5 Order Configurator
How to configure the modular IEDs
Modularity as major contribution to the perfectly tailored fitof a device
Where to place orders
How to select the IEDs functionality
The relevance of Function Points
You will learn
Training objective
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Product Code
Order configurator
Integration in the IT Systems
Function-points and function-
points calculator
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Factory Supply
Function Upgrade
Components
Devices
7SA84 7SD86
7SL87
Factory The factory supplies
Fully assembled devices
with predefined main
functionality
Individual components
Function Upgrades
Software
Devices can be ordered
with every available
hardware configuration
without any additional
R&D effort
A WEB based order configurator provides the entire setup
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 designations with Product Codes
All configuration criteria are coded with a Long Product Code
The long product code can be interpreted directly.
Example:
7SL87-AAAA-AA0-0AAAA0-AA2111-12111A-DAA000-000AA0-CH1BA1-CF0
Each long product code has a one-to-one counterpart: a Short Product Code
Example: P1C321
The short product code is a sequential number, pointing on to one specific long
product code, i.e. one specific device configuration. Devices with the same short
product code have the same configuration and therefore the same long product code.
The short product codes are managed by a TNS Server (TNS=Technical Numbering
System).
S
p
e
c
i
a
l

a
p
p
r
o
v
a
l
s
I
n
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
o
f

r
e
-
o
r
d
e
r
e
d

f
i
r
m
w
a
r
e

v
e
r
s
i
o
n
W
a
r
r
a
n
t
y
C
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

p
a
r
a
m
.
E
n
c
r
y
p
t
i
o
n
F
c
t
.

P
o
i
n
t
s

c
l
a
s
s
S
i
g
n
i
f
i
c
a
n
t

f
e
a
t
u
r
e
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

v
o
l
t
.
H
o
u
s
i
n
g
K
e
y

s
w
i
t
c
h
L
E
D

q
u
a
n
t
i
t
y
D
i
s
p
l
a
y

t
y
p
e
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

p
a
n
e
l
F
r
o
n
t

d
e
s
i
g
n
I
n
t
.

E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t

P
o
r
t

J
P
o
r
t

E
B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
C
P
U

B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
P
o
r
t

M

C
B
2
0
2
P
o
r
t

N

C
B
2
0
2
P
o
r
t

P

C
B
2
0
2
I
/
O

b
o
a
r
d

i
n
B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

i
n
B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
M
o
d
u
l
e

a
t

t
h
e

1
s
t

e
x
t
e
n
s
i
o
n

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
P
o
r
t

F
B
a
s
e

m
o
d
u
l
e
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
?
How do we get the right product code?
Device
Type
Function point class
Key-operated Switch
Operation Panel
2nd expansion module
Additional Warranty
1st expansion module
Front Design
CT sensitivity
?..
?..
?..
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order configurator
Embedded in the Internet
7SA86
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order configurator
Embedded in Siemens SAP
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
7SA86
Order configurator
Embedded in the Internet and Siemens SAP
Identi cal Frame in both applicati ons
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Comprehensive Device Configuration
NASA-Factory
Product Code (ProC)
Devices DIGSI 5 Manufacturing
ProC ProC
Order configurator
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order configurator not only a WEB application
IT system for SIPROTEC 5 configuration
NASA-Factory
Spiridon-Sales CONCERT
Customer
external
KMAT: C2010
(URL)*
KMAT: C2010
(URL)*
KMAT: C2010
(URL +KB)*
PMD
(WEB)-Information
Configuration
Siemens
Region
Siemens
internal
NASA-Sales
TNS Server
(for Short Productcode)
KMAT: C2010
(URL)*
Configurable material (KMAT)
Configuration
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI)
* URL=Link to WEB-Configurator
* KB =Knowlege Base
Siemens Region
D and
Stammhaus
KMAT: C2010
(URL)*
PMI
Product Master
Integration
PMD
Product Master
Data
WEB Configurator
(Energy IPC)
IPC: Internet Pricing Configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator Start page
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator
Device Base functionality
Device type
Tooltip with detailed
information
Hardware standard
variants as recommendation
with I/O information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator
IED Functionality
Direct navigation between
the pages
The list of available
functions can be displayed
with the function-points
calculator
The device functionality
depends on the function-
points class of the device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Starting point is the Application Template
This function is always
available, without
additional points.
Application Templates for
this IED, available for each
IED in DIGSI
This function is
preselected twice within
the selected application
template, requiring 120
points in total
The first function is always
available (with 0 points),
the second would require
25 points
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
The result is the function-points class
The IED functionality depends on the selected function-points class
Scroll bar
Resulting function-points
class to be applied to the
configuration (and to the
Product Code).
Function-points sum for
this application (template).
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Applied function-points class
Applied function-points
class
As soon as the
background of Show
resultappears in dark-
grey a plausible device
configuration is available
With Nextgo to the next
page Modulesdisplaying
the I/O-configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator: Module and I/O view
Module overview
Add a module
Remove a module
Information about detailed
I/O summary
Terminal diagram
Resulting width in 19
fractions
Show result signals
plausible device
configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Order Configurator: Detailed summary on the result page
Scroll bar
Export to PDF file
Product codes
Detailed summary
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Take aways / Call to Action
We supply fully assembled devices with predefined main functionality, even if the
customer has a specific hardware configuration
The devices are designated with a short product code, which is unique for a specific
device configuration. Each short product code has one corresponding unique long
product code
The device functionality depends on the function-points class of the device
The order configurator provides all SIPROTEC 5 configuration criteria. It is available
through the Siemens SAP Systems and the Internet
Thank you !
Perfectl y tailored fit Holistic workflow
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configurator
Intranet:
English Link: https://intranet.siemens.com/configuration/en
German Link: https://intranet.siemens.com/configuration/de
Spanish Link: https://intranet.siemens.com/configuration/es
Internet:
English:
Link:http://www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/automation/power-
transmission-distribution/protection/siprotec5/configurator.htm
German:
Link:http://www.energy.siemens.com/hq/de/automatisierung/
stromuebertragung-verteilung/schutz/siprotec5/bestellkonfigurator.htm
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Understand the key concepts and key features of DIGSI 5
Know how to handle DIGSI 5
Get an overview of the tools and editors
You will learn
Learning Target
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Overview of DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Design
- Application
- Specification
Holistic
Workflow
Operations
- Documentation
- Test
- Maintenance
Implementation
- Device selection
- Parameterization
- Engineering
- Settings
Commissioning
- Test
- Documentation
Online-
Configurator
DIGSI 5
Holistic Workflow
Consistent tools from design to operations
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 5
One single tool from plant design to operation covering all
departments saves time, provides data security and
transparency along the entire life cycle of your plant.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5
One application
No duplicate data
No synchronization
problems
No save to continue
No application
switches
No separate System
Configurator
One global save,
export, print
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
System engineering Device engineering
Holistic Workflow -
Device programming
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Holistic Workflow -
Device programming
DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Holistic Workflow -
Device programming
Device engineering &
System engineering
System design also from top-down
(Single-Line)
Intuitive configuration of the system
functions
Template support for all operation
levels
Finalize programming and
download to target devices
DIGSI 5
System and device engi neering with one tool
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of DIGSI 5
Main area
All
editors
Project Tree
Offline configurations
Online accessible devices
Libraries
Add everything
from here
Properties
Propertie
s
Informati
on
Window bar
Open editors
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of the editors
Editor specific toolbar
Switch between
different views of
editor
Control window
Close
Dock/Undock
Minimize
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Typical
workflow
Design and
Implementation
One tree following offline workflow
Define topology
Add devices
Define functionality
Adjust settings
Define communication
Create and test logic
Download settings
These steps
needs
customer
attention
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Commissioning
and Operations
One tree following online workflow
Test device and plant
Test wiring and loop
Test analog inputs
Test control functions
Test circuit-breaker
Test protection functions
Test communication
Handle fault records, logs
Check measurements
Control Circuit-breaker
Typical
workflow
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Offline Direct
Substation
One device
Offline
Configuration
Change in a copy of
current device
configuration and store
changes into device
All Devices
Project
Select access mode
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Can be accessed in parallel:
- As Offline Configuration
- Online: Changes are done in a copy
of current device configuration and
can be stored into device
Represented by one project
All devices
Substation
Online and offli ne devices without applicati on switches
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Templates
When creating devices application templates provide default device
configurations for most common cases
Templates are also available e.g. for single-lines to create bays
Drag template
from l ibrary
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Copy & Paste
Copy
Devices
Function groups, functions, function blocks
CFC charts, blocks
Communication channels e.g. to redundant channels
Single-line symbols
...
Paste
Into new device,
new project
Single-lines in displays
...
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Scope of operations
Many operations can be used on multiple levels:
Export
Import
Print
Load settings
Load firmware
Level depends on the selection in project tree:
Project level
Device level
Editor level
Project level
Device level
Editor level
2 1
Select in
project tree
Execute
function
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Import / Export
Device-related formats
I E TEAX Open device exchange format for single/multiple device(s) (powered by TEAX)
I E DEX5 Complete information of single device
I E DSP5 Display pages of single device (including custom symbols)
E RIO Export of settings to Omicron Test Universe
I ELCAD topology information from ELCAD
I CFC Continuous function chart plans from V4 (import only)
E CSV All logs and protocols as comma-separated value files
E BMP, J PG Pictures of a tripping characteristics and zone diagrams
IEC 61850 data formats
I E SCD Substation Configuration Description
I E SSD - System Specification Description
I E SED System Exchange Description
I E ICD / CID IED Capability Description / Configured IED Description (ICD with communication)
I E IID Instantiated IED Description
E MICS Model Implementation Conformance Statement (Export only)
Protocol-related data formats
E IEC 60870-5-103 protocol settings for SICAM PAS
E DIGDNP DNP3 protocol settings for SICAM PAS
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Import / Export common use cases
Preconfigured device templates
Use DEX5 format to save and reuse whole devices as templates including
settings, routings, CFC logic, displays etc.
Backup
Use DEX5 format to store device regularly in backup archive and restore
backups after device replacement
External creation of settings/routings
Create new device and import TEAX file with externally created informations
Create file from DEX5 format and specify variancethrough TEAX
Export information for usage in other products
Use DEX5 format to provide information to other tools (e.g. documentation)
Sharing workload in teams
Work in parallel on copies of a project (one specify function settings, one
routings, one system interface settings) and merge in one project using
TEAX format
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
?
VLAN ID?
Report control Block?
Prefix and suffix?
FC or DA?
LNInst?
!
VLAN ID!
Report control Block!
Prefix and suffix!
FC or DA!
LNInst!
Normal User
IEC 61850 Expert
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
The implementation of IEC 61850 edition 2 unfolds the entire
potenti al of this standard by optimally supporting your operati on
needs and making handl ing easy.
IEC 61850 Expert
Isnt familiar with the
standard (or the terms
used there)
Doesnt care about details
Simply wants to use
signals from other devices
Wants to get commu-
nication done quickly
Normal User
Knows the standard well
Exactly knows how he
wants to get things done
in IEC 61850
Wants to have access to
all details
Wants all the flexibility the
standard provides
Needs edition 2
extensions
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Translation of the IEC 61850 data models complexity into your familiar user
language
Full compatibility and interoperability with edition 1 allows an integration of
existing solutions as well the usage of all features of IEC 61850 edition 2. J ust
choose your scenario.
Flexible object modeling, flexible object address allocation and flexible
communication services guarantee highest interoperability and cost-effective
exchange and expansion concepts
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
IEC 61850 simply usable Flexible Engineering
Control Center
Operator station
Primary technology
Goose A
Report A
Report A
Task:
Exchange device of other
vendor with minimum effect
on the operations
Station Unit
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Engineering effort by different object addressing schemes
Goose S
Report S
Report S
Control Center
Operator station
Primary technology
Result:
High engineering- and test
effort for all communication
partners
Station Unit
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Flexible IEC 61850 object addressing schemes reduce effort
Station Unit
Goose A
Report A
Report A
Control Center
Operator station
Primary technology
Result:
Minimal engineering- and test
effort through flexible adoption
of the object addressing
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Overview of DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 4 to 5
DIGSI 4
Basic
DIGSI 4
Professional
DIGSI 4
Professional
+ IEC 61850
DIGSI 5
Compact
DIGSI 5
Standard
DIGSI 5
Premium
Features
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 - Variants overview
DIGSI 5
Compact
DIGSI 5
Standard
DIGSI 5
Premium
Single device handling
No IEC 61850
No Topology
No Test Support
Restricted online supp.
Free of charge
Compact
Multi Device handling
Advanced IEC 61850
(Flexible Engineering)
ELCAD Support
Test Sequences
CFC Debugging
SIGRA included
Premium
Multi device handling
IEC 61850
Single Line/Topology
Test Support
Online access of data
for multiple devices
Standard
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 - License Model
1 key allowed on up
to 10 computers
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 5
Buy 1, 5 or 10 licenses
Restricts usage to computers
Memory Stick with licenses
Needed for installation
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 - Choose what you need
Compact
Standard
Premium
Single License
Trial
Copy and use DIGSI 5 Compact
on as many computers as you
want
Scientific/Sales*
*: Restricted by area of usage
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 - Option Packages
Compact
Standard
Premium
SIGRA
SIGRA
always
included
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
New versions of DIGSI 5 - Download for free
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 5
Each new version of DIGSI 4 is
automatically shipped to all
customers who bought DIGSI 4
Customers can download for free
the update to latest DIGSI 5 from
www.siemens.com/energy
Customers can order a DVD with
latest version
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI 5 in company networks
Provide DIGSI 5 installation on an intranet site for installation
Deploy the DIGSI 5 licenses on a central server
Use the network functionalities of the Automation License Manager to
push the licenses to the computers that work with DIGSI 5
or let them pull the licenses to their machine
Keep track of who took a license or gave it back using the protocol
functionality of the Automation License Manager.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Overview of DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Visually define your primary topology in single lines
Define your topology
Import an ELCAD or SCD file
Use templates/elements
Tailor functionality of protection
devices to fit your needs
Set basic data on the primary
equipment
Easy and intuitive graphical linkage
of the device with the primary plant
Automatically create display pictures
Integrated and consistent engi neering for system and device
from si ngle line diagram up to device parameterization
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Take over the device configuration into DIGSI 5
DIGSI 5 recognizes the
individual configuration through
product code
Graphical representation of
front and back
Add new communication
modules and terminals
Specify communication
protocols for each port
Give IOs, LEDs and F-Keys
user defined labels
O
r
d
e
r

C
o
d
e
Order Configurator
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Intuitive Routing and allocation
Better overview by two
separated matrixes for:
Information routing
Powerful filtering and profiles
reduce show information as
needed
Show condensed or long
version of all columns you
need
Multi-Operation as in Excel
Use signals of other devices
via IEC 61850 as simple as
local signals
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Ensure plant safety with visual function chart (CFC) logic
IEC 61131 compliant function
blocks (CFC)
Intuitive guidance to find the right
priority level for your chart
Directly use signals without
markingthem first in the matrix
Use signals of other devices via
IEC 61850 as simple as local
signals
Reuse charts and groups of
blocks in other projects
Import DIGSI 4 charts
Offline tracing and analysis of
function charts using Test
Sequences
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
Setting the parameters of the device
Simple and consistent editing
of settings
Display a settings group for
comparison and see differ-
ences sync the settings if
you like
Easily find and change
inconsistent settings
Change settings online
without device reset
Visual display of tripping
characteristics and zones
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overview of DIGSI 5
DIGSI 5 test suite for commissioning support
Integrated Test Suite adopted to
commissioning workflow
Start with test of physical connections
Test communication and analyze
communication channels through
detailed diagnostic views
Functional testing
Stimulate inputs for testing
Use external test equipment
Create test sequences and replay them
in the device without the need of
expensive external equipment
Always keep track of your process data and
indications and store important snapshots for
later analysis in your offline parameterization
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
How the control function is designed in SIPROTEC 5
To understand the basic principles for user defined functions
Where the differences are compared to SIPROTEC 4
How to use DIGSI 5 for these purposes
How the SIPROTEC 5 devices work in a Substation Automation
Environment
What you will learn
Training Objective
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Introduction
Device architecture is based on IEC 61850 model
IEC 61850 is thesubstation automation protocol
Goals:
Full integration of protection and substation automation
Full support of IEC 61850 edition 2
Satisfy customers with high level IEC 61850 requirements
(flexible engineering)
Less engineering effort for standard engineering tasks
Do not bother customers with IEC 61850 details if they dont need it
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of control function
Parameter (settings):
Command type,
SW-Filter time,
Feedback monitoring time,
SBO timeout
Evaluation of:
Switching authority(local/remote)
Switching mode (interlocked/uninterlocked)
Interlocking conditions
Double operation blocking
Blocking by protection
Parameter:
Interlocking Conditions
(engineered in CFC)
Parameter: (settings)
Output time
Chatter blocking
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Example 1: Circuit Breaker
XCBR
CSWI
CILO
Representation of CB in routing matrix
New: Circuit Breaker includes protection function blocks
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Example 2: Disconnector
CSWI
CILO
XSWI
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Engineering Basic Definitions
Function Blocks Settings
Signals Properties
Function
Block
Function
Group
Signal
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Representation of Control Structur in DIGSI 5
Control Commandfor CB
Select logging options (for example
event log)
For transmission to system interface
Possibilityfor external aquisition
blocking (Knebelschalter)
Use these signals for outputs of
interlocking CFC plans
Physical position as connected to
binary inputs and outputs of device
For use in interlockingconditions
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Position
Use this information in interlocking
CFC plans or to connect to LEDs
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Single Line and Topology View
Topologytree is
read-only in step 1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Main Differences to SIPROTEC 4
AutomaticGOOSE configuration
Protection and Control use the same Circuit Breaker model
Single Line Editor for system view
Topology Tree (read-only in first release)
Supports IEC61850 Edition 2
More details of IEC 61850 usable
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Signal Types (1/2)
What do I have to do if I need a.
Information type SPS (Single Point Status)
Protocol text or transient indication(Wischermeldung) is a
setting
No differentiation external / internal signal
Circuit breaker or disconnect switch status only
Communication)
Communication)
Function Group / Block Transformer Tap Changer
Binary Counter Reading BCR
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Signal Types (2/2)
Circuit breaker or disconnector switch status only
Circuit breaker or disconnector switch
Contained in every function group line(Wp+, Wq+, Wp-,
Wq-)
Pulse metered value
Measured Value (result of CFC / GOOSE-Communication)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
User defined Functionblock for
grouping of information
Command with Single Feedback
Command with Double Feedback
Routing of single feedback to
binaryinput
Routing of double feedback to
binaryinputs
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Routing of commandoutput to relays
Same options for both types!
Off: Set relaywhen command is off
On: Set relaywhen command is on
Cc: Common contact; set relaywhen
command is offor on
BF: BusyFlag; set relaywhen
command is offor on, starting
with selectand endingwithend
of feedback monitoring time
All routings are allowed to be
multiple.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Introduction
Presentation with DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
What will be shown in DIGSI 5?
Select Single Line Template
Create circuit breaker and disconnect switch objects in the device
Connect switches and CTs / VTs in Single Line to device objects
Engineering of breaker and disconnect switch:
Connect to BI / BO
Create interlocking logic in CFC
Route position information to event log
Create Display Page from Single Line Editor picture
Use GOOSE messages for interlocking
Show complete settings and properties of switches (for example chatter
blocking, filter times)
Create new single point / double point indications
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Order Configurator
DIGSI Handling
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
Select SIPROTEC 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
Press Configure
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
Select Function extension
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
Fill in the device type, serial number, function point class and additional changes. Then select
the required mode of dispatch.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Order Configurator
After ordering this configuration you will get a file called *.daf.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Order Configurator
DIGSI Handling
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
The *.daf file is load into the device via DIGSI 5
Online help: Loading device functionality into
the SIPROTEC 5 device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Do you want to become a
certified expert?
Learn more about our
Curriculum concept
Introduction
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
A sustainable Competence Development Program
Expert
Advanced
Associate
What does the Curriculum consist of?
Training program of several courses on one
specific topic for a systematic competence
devolpment
The possibility to apply & be certified
in 3 different qualification levels
Associate Advanced Expert
Per Qualification Level: series of
aligned courses and associated e-tests
Certificate is valid for 5 years
Efficiently gaining knowledge
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Curricula consist of 3 qualification levels
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Benefits of Competence Development Program
Recruiters can aim at
certified applicants to
ensure adequate
capabilities of future
employees.
Participants can certify
their skills and know-
ledge to enhance their
professional market
value at home and
abroad.
Employers meet the
requirements of ISO 9001
as employees obtain
specialist knowledge and
skills through certification.
Benefit for the industry Benefit for participants Benefit for employers
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
How to obtain certification
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Substation Automation Systems
SICAM PAS Substation Automation
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC Protection
Planning Power Generation and Industry
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
Please contact us
Power Academy TD
Humboldtstrasse 50
90459 Nuremberg
Phone: +49-911-433-7415
Fax: +49-911-433-5482
E-mail: poweracademy.ic-sg@siemens.com
Download areas:
SICAM www.sicam.de
SIPROTEC www.siprotec.com
Power Quality www.powerquality.de
Energy Customer Service:
in case of required technical support
www.siemens.com/energy-support
Hotline: +49-180-524-7000
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Set the IP address
Open the editor by
double clicking on
Devices and networks
in the project tree
The back view of the
devices with all interfaces
is visible in the Device
view
After selecting the
interface in the device
view, the IP address
can be set
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Network topology
The devices can be
added to one or more
subnets in the Network
view
Click on the correct
interface and add a
subnet
The interfaces of the
other devices can then
be connected to the
same subnet
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Why do we have to initialize?
The device has to be
initialized via the USB
interface, if you want to
download parameters
into the device for the
first time
The online device
receives its IP address
The offline configuration
in the project receives
the serial number (BM
number) of the
SIPROTEC relay
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
OR
Plug & Play
Find all devices in
the subnet
OR
direct connection from
offline parameter set
Try to reach a device
through USB or
Ethernet using given
communication
settings
Two ways to connect
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Direct connection Select the IP address
If the device has been
initialized already, you
can connect directly to
the device
Select the IP address
that shall be used to
connect to the device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Direct connection
Direct connection to a
SIPROTEC device from
Right-click on the device
and select Connect to
device
A warning will appear, if
the serial number of the
online device and the
differs
If the device is not
already available in the
Lifelist (Online access),
it will appear under
Other accessible
devices
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Lifelist
The lifelist contains all
available online devices
See directly through
which interface the
devices are connected
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug & Play Find the devices
If the project does not
already contain the
device, DIGSI 5 can
search it for you
Select the network
interface that is
connected to the device
and click on Update
accessible devices
All online devices within
the local network will
appear in the lifelist
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Retrieve device data
Retrieve the device data in
two steps:
1) Basic device information
also suitable for slow
connections
2) Complete process data
Logs
Records
Expert
configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug & Play Copy a device to the project
A connected device can
directly be copied to a
project
Get the device data on
site without having the
original project
The online device can
be copied to the project
even if the configuration
already exists
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug & Play Update an existing offline configuration
An existing offline
updated with the
configuration of the
online device
Always keep your
project up-to-date
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug & Play Create an empty offline configuration
An empty offline
added to the project
The new configuration
has the same order
code as the online
device
The application
template can be chosen
independently of the
original online device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Exercise
1. Set the IP-address of the interface J
2. Initialize the device
3. Connect to the device
4. Retrieve the process data
5. Add an online device to your project through
plug & play
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Process data
Receive the process
data directly from your
The connection to the
online device will be
initiated directly
After the process data
has been downloaded,
the connection will be
disconnected
automatically
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Get the complete
process data at once
OR
Download individual
process data:
Logs
Records
Indication snapshots
Measurement
snapshots
Working online
Process data
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Online connection
An online connection is
identified by:
orange bar
magic eye
connection icon
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Online Device
Device information
Logs
Records
Indications
Measurements
Test Suite
Safety & Security
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Device Information
General device
information:
Name
Relay type (e.g. 7SL87)
Serial number
Configuration version
Product code
The device mode can be
changed:
Commissioning
Process
Simulation
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Device Information Time Information
Information regarding
time synchronization
Device time can be set
manually
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Device Information Hardware Information
General hardware
information
Information of each
hardware module
Information of each
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Logs
Operational log
Fault log
Setting-history log
2 User-defined logs
All log entries can be
deleted
Logs can be saved to a
file (e.g. csv)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Logs
Set the time reference
Sort the log entries
according to:
Time
Name
Value
Number
Quality
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Records
Find all fault records
Export the fault records
Save an overview of the
fault records to a file
Create test fault
records
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Indications
Indications are updated
continuously
Indications can be
saved as snapshots in
the offline configuration.
Indications can be
cleared
Save indications to a
file
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Measurement Values
Measurement values of
each function group
e.g. - Line
- Circuit Breaker
Operational values
Fundamentals
Symmetrical components
Min/Max values
Energy values
Statistics
User-defined values
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Measurement Values
Measurement
Snapshots are saved in
Change between
primary, secondary and
percentage values
Save snapshots to a file
(e.g. csv)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Test Suite
Verify the wiring
Diagnostic tools for the
Monitoring of analog
inputs
Test the control
functions
Test the circuit breaker
Check the correct
behavior of the
protection functions
Test your
communication
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Safety & Security
Safety
Confirmation IDs for
different safety-relevant
device operations
Security
Password for a secure
DIGSI connection
(NERC compliant)
Passwords and
changed individually for
each device
Passwords and
reset
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Information routing
Communication
mapping
Settings
FGs (e.g.
Line 1)
Power
System
Recording
Device settings
Time settings
Function charts (CFC)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Working online
Choose the setting
group you want to
change
Click on Edit Settings
Change the settings
Load the changes to
them
Settings of two different
setting groups can be
compared
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Change the settings
in the matrix
Load the changes to
them
Working online
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Additional
functionality can be
ordered subsequently
Add more function
points to the device
Add significant
features (e.g.
additional ends for a
7SD)
You will receive a
daf-file that contains
the changes
This daf-file can be
imported into the
online device
Working online
Upgrade device functionality
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
To disconnect, right-
click on the online
device and select
Disconnect device
Working online
Disconnect
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Exercise
1. Check the measurement values and save
a snapshot
2. Check the log files
3. Change the settings in your online device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Load configuration
one device
numerous devices:
will be listed
If a device is not
continue with the
next
one
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Select the device(s)
Load the configuration
Load configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Working online
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Load the firmware
Load the firmware into
numerous devices:
will be listed
If a device is not
continue with the
next
one
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Choose which relay(s)
you want to update
Set the firmware
version
Load the firmware
Load the firmware
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
It is not necessary to
load the complete
firmware
Particular parts of the
firmware can be
selected:
Mainboardfirmware
Boot system of a
communication
interface

Mark the project and
click on Online->
Expert view
Select the required
parts and load the
firmware
Load the firmware
Expert view
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Exercise
1. Transmit the changed configuration into one
device
2. Load the complete firmware into two different
devices
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Learn how to configure a SIPROTEC 5 device
Learn how to work with the editors needed for configuration
Get familiar with the workflow of the editors
You will learn
Learning Target
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing DIGSI 5
There is one installation routine for all
DIGSI 5 editions and languages
The functionality available does not depend on
what you install
But it depends on the license key you specify later
Upgrading to a more feature-rich DIGSI 5 edition just means
providing a new license key
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing DIGSI 5
Run setup.exe from the DIGSI 5 setup
You can choose the language of the installation
Setup installs all available languages of DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing DIGSI 5
Choose location where to install DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Three ways of starting DIGSI 5
OR
Choose in Start menu:
Siemens Energy
DIGSI 5 V1.00
DIGSI 5 V1.00
OR
(Double) Click on
DIGSI 5.exe:
DIGSI 5.exe
OR
(Double) Click on a
DIGSI 5 project:
Myproject.d5v1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Starting DIGSI 5...
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing your license(s)
After starting DIGSI
5 you have the
choice
Run DIGSI 5 as
Compact edition
Install a license
for DIGSI 5
Standard or
Premium
Start DIGSI 5 in
Trial mode
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Installing your license(s) using license manager
Install license(s)
From USB-stick
From other computers
You can store multiple
licenses on your computer
and
Move them to other
machines on the
network
Let other machines
grab them from that
machine
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
DIGSI Device Drivers
DIGSI 5 device drivers and firmware updates are all packaged
in so called
DIGSI device drivers (DDD)
Container for transport of all loadable components to the user.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Excursion
How to read DDD names
Example:
7SA85 FW-V01.02 CFG-V01.01 DDD-V01.00
Device type Firmware Configuration DDD version
version version (continuous counter incr.
when FW or CFG changes)
Definition of version:
Vvv.xy
Major Release
Minor Release
Maintenance Release
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
2
Importing device drivers
Import the device drivers you need: ToolsImport device drivers
1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Create or open a project
Create project using:
File New
Or open an existing one
File Open
Or choose one of the
previously opened projects
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Three ways of creating single-lines
OR
Import from file:
ELCAD files
From Topologies
TEAX
SCD, SSD
OR
Use templates from
library:
OR
The symbol library:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Switching between standards
Choose OptionsSettings and select the DIGSIpage to toggle standard
The standard can be even changed on existing single-line diagrams
Select standard before creating display pages from single lines
3 3
bV akV
OR
IEC ANSI
?
3 3
bV akV
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Start single-line editor with
double click on Single-line
configurationin project
tree.
Drag template
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Drag template
From library
existing busbars
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
existing busbars
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Drag and drop elements
Elements get automatically
connected if dropped close
to bottom of other element
Rename elements
Drag element
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Bays are created
automatically
When dropping in existing
bay it gets extended,
otherwise a new bay is
created
Manually connect
elements by selecting one
connection point and
dragging to other
Drag element
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Set basic primary equipment data
Select primary equipment
like voltage and current
transformers in SLE
Set their basic settings
(e.g. ratios) in their
properties
After you added and
connected a device you
can take over those
settings to all connected
device (more details
coming in some slides)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Add new device
OR
Create device by product code:
Choose Add new device in
project tree
Specify short or long product
code
Choose Application template
that fits best
OR
Use Devices & Networks editor:
Choose device in library
Drag and drop Application
template from library to editor
In Devices & Networks editor (device view)
Add front panels
Add communication modules
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Add new device using product code
Add new device by clicking
Add new devicein project
tree.
Copy product code (long or
short) from the order
configurator or device label
If short product code is not
recognized DIGSI 5 tries to
update list of short product
codes from the internet
Significant features of your
device are displays
Select application template
that fits best your needs
(you can later add and
remove functionality as
needed)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basic
I - 3 ph
U- 3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U- 1 ph S 1
U- 1 ph S 2
I - 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U- 3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int . lk
CB
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basi c
I -3 ph
U-3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U-1 ph S 1
U-1 ph S 2
I- 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U-3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int. lk
CB
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basi c
I -3 ph
U-3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U-1 ph S 1
U-1 ph S 2
I- 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U-3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int. lk
CB
Connect the physical current and voltage terminals with the
logical measuring points in the Measuring-point routing
editor.
Connect measuring-points to function groups and
functions groups underneath each other in the
Function-group connections editor.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
You can connect measuring points to function
groups in two ways
In function-group connections editor
In Single-line configuration editor
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
To add functionality drag
function groups, functions
and function blocks from
library to device in SLE
(or to project tree)
Or copy existing
(parameterized) elements
and paste them
Rename elements
Select elements and delete
them if not needed
(context menu)
Tips:
Change setting in
properties of elements
Add comments
Define the functionality of the device
Drag FG, FN, FB
from l ibrary
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basi c
I -3 ph
U-3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U-1 ph S 1
U-1 ph S 2
I- 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U-3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int. lk
CB
mm
QA
BB 1
T1.1
T1.2
T5
U4
U1
U2
U3
I1
I2
I3
I4
MP
CT-3ph 1
MP
VT-3ph 1
FG Line FG CB
21
78
BI
BO
to
CB QA
FL
7SL86: AT Basi c
I -3 ph
U-3 ph
I - parl
PDI
IF
Interface of FG
movablefunctions
87
I - PTstar
FG PDI
SI
PDI
PDI
50 51 N
SOTF
51
IF
U-1 ph S 1
U-1 ph S 2
I- 3 ph
U-3 ph S 1
U-3 ph S 2
Ctrl
Int. lk
CB
Primary equipment connections
Connect the primary equipment with measuring points in
the Single-line configuration editor
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Connect device and primary equipment
Connect voltage and
current transformers to
function groups in devices
Connect Trip signal of
switching groups to
switching equipment in
bay, e.g. to visually
indicate which CB is
operated
Manually shift connections
if the automatic layout is
not sufficient
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Synchronize primary settings with device
If you have specified the
primary equipment settings
before, then you want to
synchronize them now with
the connected devices
Select a device to synchronize
Hit Synchronizebutton to
update device settings with
the settings of the primary
equipment.
This is a manual process to
avoid accidental overriding of
settings.
Therefore inconsistencies will
be shown by a red border of
the bay if one side changes
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Using the topology view
Switch to Topology tree
view using the tab selector
See and check the
connections between
function groups and
primary equipment
Change names for primary
equipment, also fr sub
station and voltage level
Add and review comments
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Start Devices & Networks
editor with double click on
Devices & Networksin
project tree.
You can also directly open
the Device view by double
clicking on Hardware &
Protocolsunder a device
hardware extensions
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
hardware extensions
Drag and drop devices
from Hardware catalog to
editor
Select appropriate
application template
in the automatically
shown dialog
Drag device
from Hardware
catalog
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Switch to Device view
by either double
clicking on a device in
Network view
Or by changing the
view selector to
Device viewand
selecting a device in
the toolbar
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Selecting elements in the
Hardware catalog shows
details in the window in the
lower right-hand corner
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Modify hardware in Device view
Add/Modify
Current terminals
Communication
modules
Front panels
To do so
Double click on
hardware extension
places them in first
available slot
Drag & Drop elements
from Hardware catalog
to empty slot
Drag elements
from Hardware
catalog
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Modify hardware and specify settings in Device view
By selecting a hardware
element (terminal block,
communication
module/port, front panel
you can specify settings
Select module and specify
settings and labels for
binary IO
Select terminal block and
Select front panel and
for LEDs and F-Keys
Select communication port
to specify protocols and
protocol settings
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Specify communication settings
set the properties on page
Ethernet addresses:
IP adress
Subnet connection
Create new subnet

S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Specify communication protocol
set the protocols supported
channel by channel on
page Channel x settings:
Network protocols
Communication
protocols
Settings of the
protocols on subpages
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Add devices to subnets visually
As mentioned: In the
properties of each
communication port one
can set the subnet the
device is connected to
But: You can also do it
visually
by connecting the ports
to an existing network
By connection ports of
multiple devices to
create a new subnet
Specify a meaningful
subnet name
See properties of subnet
for a bandwidth estimation.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Device information the business card of the device
Bild von DI -> Erste seite
Basic information about the
device
Type
Serial number of
connected online device
Possibility to upgrade device
parameter set
If your device has several
Ethernet interfaces you need
to specify which one is used
for connecting with DIGSI 5.
(see DIGSI 5: Details -
Prepare and establish
connection to the device(s)
Select language of the device
display
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Configuring devices
Device information - Resource consumption
Overview over vital
resources used in the
device
Processor load: If too
many elements are
added that cant be
handled by the device
a list of categories
helps reducing load
Used and available
function points
Used CFC ticks and
critical block types
Use Refreshbutton to
update display when
keeping editor open
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Navigate to settings and extend functionality
Open Settings editor by
selecting a function in
project tree and double
click on that
Navigate through functions
using toolbar buttons
You can easily add function
blocks of same type using
buttons
Delete stages using
buttons if they are not fixed
part of the default
configuration
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Change settings
Select setting group for
change
Available, if multiple
setting groups exist
Change settings
Invalid settings are
displayed with red
background
Check tooltips for valid
ranges
Use arrows beneath
input field to change
value to next valid one
Some settings dont belong
to all setting groups. They
are indicated by icon
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Identify settings by unique number
Turn unique setting
numbers on e.g. to easier
communication with
colleagues
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Compare setting groups
To compare two settings
group just select the
comparison group
Compare values
Differences are
indicated by icon
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Synchronize setting groups
Select a function block by
clicking into gray area
Choose Synchronize
This copies setting values
of the function block from
the comparison group to
setting group for change
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Check diagrams that vi sualize settings
Many setting groups
contain graphical
representation of stages
and tripping characteristics
Diagram automatically
adjusts to setting changes
Select stages to be shown
in key of diagram
Zoom in and out
Use mouse cursor in the
diagram to get the values
at certain points
Save picture of diagram or
copy to clipboard for usage
in documentation tools
Print directly from editor
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Setting group handling
Open Settings >Device
Settings in project tree
Or directly jump from
settings editor using the
toolbar buttons:
Change number of setting
groups
Copy settings of a setting
group to another one
Change active setting
group
Choose setting group
Choose selection
criterion
Change edit mode
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Adjust Settings
Change settings wherever you see function blocks
You can also change
settings wherever you see
functions
E.g. in Single-line
configuration
Select function block
Open Properties area
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Different tasks different editors
All mappings to protocols
Information routing
All routings (except to protocols)
DIGSI 4
Masking I/O
(Configuration
matrix)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Information routing Editor
Open Information
routing Editor by double
clicking on Information
routingin project tree
Editor is best viewed in
Maximize mode
Rows display signals
and cols possible
routing sources and
destinations.
Stars indicate that
collapsed rows contain
data
Right click on cell to
show possible values
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Short and long display mode
Double clicking on a
column header toggles
between short and long
column mode
Choose per column
what column mode to
use
Use toolbar buttons to
toggle all columns
Short display mode
group e.g. all BIs
Long: U
Short: U3, L5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Manage information overload
Showing everything means
a lot to read
Use scenario based filters
by selecting appropriate
view in drop down list in
toolbar
Use column filters to
restrict displayed infor-
mation
Show only signals
containing Pickup
Show only signals
routed to LED 1
Show only signals
routed to any BI
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Excursion
Filtering in grids
Filter column by selecting an existing
value:
Choose (Custom) for complex filters:
(does not) equal
(does not) begin/end with
(does not) contain
Remove all filters at once
This filtering functionalities are available in all grids
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Adding new signals and other functionality
Drag & drop from
Libraries to hierarchy in
Information routing
FG, FN, FB
User-defined
function block
New signals in
function blocks
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Rename everything
Rename all FG,FN,FB
as well as signals
Regardless if system- or
user defined ones
Rename in tree
Or rename in properties
Here you see also
the original name
Elements used in
IEC 61850 have an
additional name and
path
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Comment everything
Inspection remarks
What needs to be done
When to review or
inspect next time
Not only in Information
routing but in all editors
and for all elements:
Add comments to
each element in
Properties tab >
User Information
Those comments are
saved and exported
to TEAX
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Change settings quickly
Select function blocks
(like stages)
Settings are displayed
in properties page
Settings
Only for active setting
group and selected edit
mode (prim, sec. %)
Change in device
information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Change hardware settings of I/O in Information routing
Select columns of LEDs,
BI, BO, K-Keys
Change settings like
color, user label in
properties page
Settings
Only works in long
column mode
Observe tooltip of BIs,
BOs, LEDs
They contain location
information
User defined labels
(check excursion)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Excursion
User labels makes it easy to find the right things
In Hardware & Protocols editor: Select housing
Specify user labels for
LEDs
Function keys
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
Current and
voltage terminals
Also available are other
hardware related settings
LED color
Threshold of BIs
All editors working with those elements display user comments
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Route information
Reuse
Copy and paste
Function groups, functions, function blocks, signals
Selected areas in grid to other place in grid
Selected columns in grid to other columns
Selected rows, full grid or selected areas of grid to Excel
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust settings
Route information
Create Display pictures
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Add new chart by double
clicking on Add new chart
underneath Function
chartsin project tree.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Select a name for the chart
Select the CFC task
A detailed explanation
helps you to select the
right task.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Overcoming the great void of charts
CFC charts are compatible
to IEC 61131
Conversion between
simple data types happen
automatically
This simplifies charts a
lot
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Add content to your function chart
OR
Reuse charts or blocks:
Import charts from DIGSI 4
Copy charts from other
devices and projects in DIGSI 5
paste (keeps connections)
OR
Build it yourself using the block
library:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Manually add and connect function blocks
to editor
Connect blocks by clicking
on port and drag to other
port
Add constants by selecting
input and typing value
paste
includes connections
Drag element
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
task card
inputs / outputs
(MV))
Choose if you want to see
signals as well-known
margins or flags
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Extendable blocks
Some blocks show a green
triangle on bottom
Those can be extended by
the number of inputs
Open properties of the
block
Choose page I/Os
Enable display of
additional inputs
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Control flow
Get a good overview over
all connections between
blocks
Change static values of the
inputs easily
Add new blocks here as
well
Connect inputs by with
signals from the Signal
task card via drag & drop
See tracing values while
CFC Tracing and Watching
is activated in a table form
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Resource consumption of function charts
Open Device information
by double clicking on
Device informationin
project tree.
Select tab Resource
consumption
Validate resource
consumption of function
charts
When a limit is exceeded
then an inconsistency
warning indicates that
Hit refresh when keeping
editor open and updated
list shall be provided
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust parameters
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Three ways of creating pages
OR
Create from singe-line:
Select bay or
device and create
displays
Copy elements and
paste in displays
OR
Use existing ones:
OR
the symbol library:
Import from file
Use the ones in
application templ.
Copy from other
device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
The manual approach
Choose desired symbol
standard (ANSI or IEC) at
OptionsSet Standard
to editor
Draw lines between
elements by clicking on
port and drag to other port
Add texts with text tool in
toolbar
Add measured values or
dynamic texts with tool in
toolbar
Rotate elements as
needed
Drag element
From library
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Display page properties
Reorder pages by
drag&dropin project tree
order shown in DIGSI 5
will same as in device
Select default page in
properties
Change name in headline,
properties or project tree
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Elements with (no) signals
assigned are indicated in
different colors
task card
symbols or measured
value fields
(MV))
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
If you have IEC 61850
enabled you can drag
signals of other devices in
the same subnet from
library to symbols or
measured value fields
GOOSE connections are
created automatically
Drag single or double point
indications or measured
values on an empty place
in display to create
dynamic text fields
automatically
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Default controllable symbol
All display pages are
control pages
Select default element in
properties of symbol
Will be selected by
default if hitting control
key on device
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Create custom symbol
Create new symbol using
tool from toolbar
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Symbol editor: Create new symbol
Choose width and height
Choose static or dynamic
symbol
Select default state
Add or move red bullets
who indicate ports for
connections
Draw symbol using the
provided drawing tools
Closed shapes can be
filled
Move or resize parts using
the mouse cursor tool
Hit OK on bottom to take
over symbol to display
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Symbol editor: Reuse symbols
Drag & Drop symbol from
library to that as starting
point
Symbol in library is not
changed
Select parts or full symbol
in one state and copy to
other states
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Fault display editor
Specify information
displayed on device
display in case of faults
Choose for each line what
information to display
Select the circuit breaker
to show the fault displays
for
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
Configuring devices
Adjust parameters
Route information
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Measuring-point routing
All measuring points
coming by application
templates are ready for
use
Add new measuring points
(1 or 3 phase)
Added measuring points
physical terminals
function group
Connect interfaces
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Application templates:
Measuring points are pre-connected
with function group interfaces.
New function groups added from the
library:
The connection between measuring
points and function group interfaces
needs to be defined by the user.
Current 3-phase <none>
Circuit Breaker 1
Line Current 3-phrase CT 3-phase 1
Line 1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
All Function groups coming
by application templates
are ready for use
Added Function groups
Measuring points
Circuit-breaker groups
Other function groups
Protection function
groups
function group
Connect interfaces
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Current 3-phase CT 3-phase 1
Circuit Breaker 1
Line Current 3-phase CT 3-phase 1
Line 1
These connections (measuring point / function group interface) are shown in
Single-line configurations editor
Function group connections editor
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
08 Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
Content
Content
Documentation Overview
Documents for Line Protection
Devices
Contents of System Catalog
Contents of Device Manuals
Document front cover
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 Documentation Overview
Others
Marketing Sales
SIPROTEC 5
Engineering
guide
Manuals
Device
Manuals
SIPROTEC 5
Communication
Protocols
Manuals
SIPROTEC 5
Operating
Manual
p
la
n
n
e
d

S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 Line Protection Devices
Device documentation
Device catal og
One document for all line protection devices 7SA8,
7SD8, 7SL8, 7VK8
Overall functional description
No technical data included link to the
manual/download area
Device manuals
One manual for Distance Protection
and Line Differential Protection for 3-pole tripping
7SA84, 7SD84, 7SA86, 7SD86, 7SL86
One manual for Distance Protection,
Line Differential Protection and Breaker Management
for 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
System Catalog
Content
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
Device manuals
Content
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
08 Documentation
SIPROTEC 5 System Discriptions
http://www.siemens.com/siprotec5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
06 Function groups and application template
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: The advantages
1.The same function can be used in different devices
user statement: why is the 7SA BF protection functiondifferent from 7SJ ?
the above fact causes confusion / clarification
2.Better response timeregarding customer requirements
functional improvement for function A in device type X is also available for function A in
device type Y (only the release for this device is required)
3.The user has not to buyfunctions which are not required for his application
4.Functions and their settings could be copied within one device or between devices
5.Enhanced functional flexibility, e.g.
another protection stage can be added
a function can be routed to any analogue input
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
SIPROTEC 5 provides modular functions
21
50
51
49
81
59
27
25
79
48
Functions can be moved !

21
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
The functions are grouped to primary objects like Line, CB,
via so called Function Groups
21
51
49
81
59
25
79
FG Line FG CB
trip
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
A device will incorporate different function groups, e.g. a distance protection
device:
Line: includes protection functions related to a line
CB: includes functions related to a CB
Further function groups: transformer, motor, disconnector,
21
51
49
81 59
FG Line FG CB
25 79
trip
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
The Functi on Groups (FG) incorporate Interfaces for current / voltage
measurement values
The functions in the FG are assigned automatically to these interfaces
21
51
49
81 59
FG Line FG CB
IF
IF
79
trip
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
The Functi on Groups (FG) receive measured values from Measuri ng
Points (MP) via the interfaces
The connection between FG and MP is configurable by DIGSI 5
21
49
81 59
FG Line FG CB
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
MP-I
IF
51
trip
79
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
The Measuring Points (MP) are routed to the analogue input terminals
The connection between MP and terminal is configurable by DIGSI 5
FG Line FG CB
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
21
49
81 59
51
trip
79
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Device
Reclosing?
FG Line FG CB
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
IF IF
21
49
81 59
51
trip
79
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Device
FG CB
trip
79
IF
Modularity: How?
Reclosing?
FG Line
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
21
49
81 59
51
trip
79
FG
CB
IF
trip
79
FG
CB IF
IF
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Device
FG CB
trip
79
IF
Modularity: How?
How are commands and signals processed to device terminals?
Commands & signals are routed to the BOs (terminals) by DIGSI 5
FG Line
MP-I
MP-V
IF IF
IF IF
21
49
81 59
51
IF IF
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Structure of the chosen Application Template
Device 7SL87, AT Basic
FG Line
21
51
MP-I
MP-V
FG CB
Int.Lk
IF
IF
IF IF
Ctrl
51N 50
FL
78
87
More detailed form: all interfaces shown simplified form:
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Device
Modularity: How?
How? SIPROTEC 5-functions may contain a flexible no. of stages
(protection elements)
Function-stages can be moved !
51
51-1
51-2
51-3
Function
Function-stages
FG Line
21
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: Moving of functions
Moving of functions:
Remove (delete) from a FG
Add from the library
Copy from FG 1 to FG 2
Copy within a FG
Copy from device x to device y
FG 1
21
51
59
DIGSI 5 Library
21
:
27
25
48
27
FG 2
51 51
Device B, Application y
FG 1
21
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Add from the library, e.g. for 1,5 CB appl.
Device, Application x
FG Line
DIGSI 5 Library
MP-I
MP-V
FG type CB
21
FG CB-A
25
MP-V
FG type x
25
MP-V MP-V
FG CB-B
25
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Copy within the application
Copy from device A to device B
Delete within an application
FG line
MP-I
MP-V
21
FG CB B
25
MP-V
FG CB A
25
MP-V
Device B
FG Line
21
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: Review
Device 7xyz, Application xyz
Functions (FNs) may contain stages, the no. of stages can be altered
FNs are grouped via the functi on groups (FGs)
FGs are interconnected via interfaces (IF), the connection is configurable
FGs are connected to measuring points (MPs) via interfaces,
the connection is configurable
MPs and Circuit-breaker FG are connected to the terminals, the
connection is configurable
FG Line
21
51 49
81 59
27
FG CB
27
27-1
27-2
25 79
trip
IF
IF
IF IF
MP-I
MP-V
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Modularity: How?
Lets review, important terms:
Function group (FG)
Function (FN)
Stage
Measuring point (MP)
Interfaces (IF) of FGs
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Settings & information
Device A / application x
Details: Have a look at the settings and information hierarchy
FG 1
FN 1
Stage 1
Stage 2
FN 2
Group Inform.
information
General
Stage 1
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
What for?
How do we support the user to start his engineering work as close to his
application as possible?
Via offering so called Application Templates.
The Application template is the predefinition of the overall device
functionality, it defines:
1. Default-composition of stages, FNs, FGs, MPs and their connections
2. Default settings and default signal routing
3. Default device display
4. Default CFC-charts
it is a little bitcomparable to the SIPROTEC 4 parameter set
Application Confi guration:
Actual device functionality (evolved from an AT)
Next click next page
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Differences to SIPROTEC 4 and benefits
Free composition of stages, FNs, FGs, MPs and their connections
gives the user the freedom to perfectly match his real application,
from simple to sophisticated applications
keeps away complexity ( see what you need )

The availability of different AT for one device-type
the user starts the engineering from a basis very close to his real
application

The user can save the AC as a new AT (step 2 feature)

S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Application Template
1. When adding a device to the DIGSI 5-project, the user selects the application
template that fits best to the real application
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Device 7SA84 / Application Basic
FG Line
E.g. the device type distance protection 7SA84 will provide the following 4 application
templates:
DIGSI 5
7SA84 Application templates:
Basic
MV cable, comp./isol.
MV overhead line, comp./isol.
HV overhead line, earthed
line
busbar
21
FL
51 51N 50
FFM
FG CB
trip
MP-I
MP-U
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Application template / configuration
1. When adding a device to the DIGSI 5-project, the user selects the
application template that fits best to the real application
2. The user adopts the functional scope to his real application
70% case: by adding or removing functions and/or stages
30% case: by adding FGs, MPs (and FNs) and their inter-connection as
well as to the routing to the process
3. The user routes all signals regarding physical/logical sources/destinations
4. If required: - Creating CFC-charts - Editing the default display
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Engineering Work Flow: Altering the functional scope -> add FN
Copy (drag & drop) the function from the library into the FG
Library-structure and device-functional structure are identical
If you know one answer you know both
If you dont know it you look in the manual: there the position is given
to copy it?
to copy it?
Add the function 3-ph undervoltage protection (27)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
AT Overhead line
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
AT 1.5 CB
QA
QA
QA
T2.2
T1.1
T5
T15
Tapped
LINE
BB 1
BB 2
T1.2
T2.1
T2.2
T1.1
T1.1
T2.2
QB91
QB92
T16
U4
U1
U2
U3
U4
I1
I2
I3
I4
MU-U (6)
1phase
MU-I (3)
3phase
MU-U (4)
3phase
FG Line
3 I
3 U
1 I
PD I
FG CB A-QA
3 I
1 U
IF IF
serial
interface 1
21
87
51
78 50BF
25
79
Int.Lk
Ctrl
BI
BO
to
CB A- QA
FL
I1
I2
I3
I4
MU-I (5)
3phase
U1
U2
MU-U (1)
3phase
serial
interface 2
MN (+)
87Stub
FG CB B-QA
3 I
IF
50BF
25
79
Int.Lk
Ctrl
BI
BO
to
CB B- QA
3 U IF 27 59 81
FG 3phase voltage
Supervison of busvoltage and frequency
7SL86 or 7SL87
A-
B-
C-
3 U
1 U
3 U
U3
MU-U (2)
1phase
59 27
59N
81
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
SIPROTEC 5 /
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
configuration
Protocol testing
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Front view of the device with USB interfaces
USB interface for PC with DIGSI 5
Standard USB cable (no special cable required)
No USB hub supported
Initialize device via USB interface necessary for
the initial configuration
USB interface for a memory stick
Allow connection of a memory stick
Future features possible like:
Read out file system, logs and fault records
Authorize with a memory stick (user authorization)
Device replacement. Device configuration stored
on the memory stick.
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Plug-in module (Position E)
Can be equipped with every available plug in-module
E
F
Plug-in module (Position F)
Integrated Ethernet interface (Port J )
Rear standard Ethernet interface for DIGSI 5
Option: Cost effective IEC 61850 client server
communication (for six clients,
no GOOSE messages)
J
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Time synchronization port (Port G)
Time telegrams IRIB-B00 from GPS receiver
Time telegrams from a DFC 77 receiver
1 s pulse for high precision time sync. applications
Fully pin compatible with SIPROTEC 4 Port A
(all external converters and cables can be
used)
G
Separate/remote operational panel
(Port H)
Connection to remote operational panel
External panel will be fully supplied by this port
H
K
Com-Link to expansion module (Port K)
Communication link to expansion module CB202
Special Ethernet link (can not be used as
standard Ethernet connection)
CB202 can not be used stand alone
J
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Rear view of expansion module CB202
for 3 additional plug-in module
Plug-in module (Position N)
Plug-in module (Position M)
Can be equipped with special plug-in-modules
(20 mA analog inputs)
Not designed for use with communication modules
Com-Link to base module (Port L)
Communication link to Port K of base module
L
M
N
P
Terminal block
For independent wide range power supply
Plug-in module (Position P)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
A trend-setting communication architecture
A new communication design
Hardware and communication design is like playing with LEGO bricks
Building new functions through use of programmable FPGA
1)
hardware
(HDLC controller, time tagging, MAC address filtering for GOOSE).
Microprocessors is running inside the FPGA
Different applications running on one module type
(Serial protocols and protection data interface on one type of module)
Separation of communication (plug-in module) and protection / control application
(main CPU)
from easyone
to complex functions
1) Field programmable gate array
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Communication plug-in modules
A common architecture is used for all modules
Ethernet module
without / with integrated switch
Universal
serial module with 2 optical ports
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

b
u
s

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
w
i
t
h

E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t

l
i
n
k
s
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

b
u
s

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
P
h
y
s
i
c
a
l

f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d
P
h
y
s
i
c
a
l

f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
o
r

w
i
t
h
f
u
l
l
y

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
a
b
l
e
h
a
r
d
w
a
r
e
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
o
r

w
i
t
h
f
u
l
l
y

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
a
b
l
e
h
a
r
d
w
a
r
e
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

p
h
y
s
i
c
a
l
f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d

(
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t
)
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

p
h
y
s
i
c
a
l
f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d

(
s
e
r
i
a
l
)
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
o
r

w
i
t
h
f
u
l
l
y

p
r
o
g
r
a
m
a
b
l
e
h
a
r
d
w
a
r
e
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

p
h
y
s
i
c
a
l
f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d

(
s
e
r
i
a
l
)
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

b
u
s

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
P
h
y
s
i
c
a
l

f
r
o
n
t

e
n
d
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Serial electrical and optical communication module
One or two RS485 ports with RJ 45
connectors for one / two independent protocol
applications
Use of standard Ethernet patch cables saves
cost for cabling (no 7XV5103 cables required)
(e.g. USART-AB-1EL, USART-AC-2EL)
One or two 820 nm fiber optical ports with
ST connectors for one / two
Optical connector and cabling fully compatible
to SIPROTEC 4. Multimode-fiber 62,5/125 m
(e.g. USART-AD-1FO, USART-AE-2FO)
Synchronous (HDLC or IEEE C37.94)
or asynchronous operation mode
Electrical module with RS485 interface
Fiber optical module with
820 nm interface
U
S
A
R
T
-A
C
-2
E
L
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Optical long distance communication modules
One or two 1300 / 1550 nm ports with LC
simplex or LC duplex connectors for one/two
Spanned distance over single mode fiber
24 km / 60 km / 100 km with 2 fibers
40 km over 1 fiber (integrated WDM*)
Saves expensive fibers for long distances
Spanned distance over multimode fiber
4 km with 2 fiber cables
Identical hardware like 24 km
single mode module
(e.g. USART-AF-1LDFO, USART-AW-2LDFO)
* Wave division multiplexer
Optical long distance module
with two 1300 or 1550 nm interfaces
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Optical or electrical Ethernet module
Two ports without or with integrated switch
Spanned distance over electrical Ethernet
Two RJ 45 connectors
20 m with CAT5 double shielded cables
Spanned distance over optical Ethernet
2 LC-duplex connectors
2 km with 50/125 um or 62,5/125 um fiber cables
Operation without or with the integrated switch
for the optical and electrical Ethernet module
One or two ports connected to an external switch.
Active port and hot standby port if one
connection fails (as SIPROTEC 4 EN100)
Operation with integrated switch. RSTP for max. 40
devices in a Ethernet ring topology. This mode is
available for every Ethernet based application (e.g.
IEC 61850, DNP 3, syncrophasor protocol ...... )
(e.g. ETH-BA-2EL, ETH-BB-2FO)
Electrical Ethernet module with
two electrical ports
Optical Ethernet module with
two optical ports
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
General features of the communication in
SIPROTEC 5 devices
Two module positions in the base housing (E / F). Another three module
positions on CB202 extension for communication (M,N,P)
Customer orders plug-in modules which are not preconfigured with a protocol
or communication - application.
Protocols or applications running on plug-in modules are assigned to the
specific module and it's port with DIGSI 5 during the initial configuration
process.
Two serial communication applications running on one module offer a high application
density (e.g. IEC 60870-5-103 and protection data interface on one USART-AE2FO module).
Communication redundancy (+time sync.)
Hardware redundancy (e.g. two substation control interfaces pluggable, two ports)
Optical or electrical ring configuration (no interruption of the ring when CB202 is supplied from
another battery as the main device)
Functional redundancy (e.g. redundant protocols with 2*IEC 60870-5-103)
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Content
Content
configuration
Protocol testing
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Which protocol applications are running on
which module?
Protocols running on serial modules:
IEC 60870-5-103, DNP 3, PI (Protection Interface)
Protocols running on Ethernet modules:
IEC 61850 (C/S
1)
, GOOSE), DNP 3, IEEE C37.118, SNTP, RSTP, DCP, DIGSI 5
1) Clients <->Server
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
www.siemens.com/poweracademy Copyright Siemens AG 2012. Al l rights reserved.
SIPROTEC 5/
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
50 51 87L 50BF 25 79 21
A V f P
Q cos A max
-kWh +kWh
SW HW I=0
SF6 loss Pick up CB Live ti me
Trip log Status log Alarm log
t/s
-0,4 -0,3 -0,2 -0,1 -0,0 0,1 0, 2 0,3 0,4 0,5
CurrentiL2/ A
-4
-2
0
2
Local
Remode
SLD
Sequences Bay Interlocking
DCF 77 GPS IRIG B IEC 103
IEC 103 IEC 61850 GOOSE
Safe CT Interl ock
Passwort
BI BO
Interfase I-Simulation
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 Protection Application
SIPROTEC 5 includes all protection functions for transmission and subtransmission networks
SIPROTEC 5 is applicable for different substation designs
Single, double and triple busbar designs
1,5 CB schemes, .
Application templates are available for different schemes
User defined standards leads simplification and repeatability
Copying of functions and setting between the devices
The library concept increases the flexibility
Required functions can easily be loaded into the device
A wide range of proven protection functions are available
Possible extensions are made simple (add stages, zones,..)
A clear functional structure (function groups) clusters the functions, allows flexible
applications and guarantees correct operation
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 Control and Automation
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 includes all functions for Control and Automati on of transmission
and subtransmission networks
CFC (continuous function chart) includes all elements for interlocking
Local control on the device
Remote control through DIGSI
Remote control from the SSA through serial interface
Application templates are available with predefined interlocking
User defined standardization
Complete Station interlocking through IEC61850 and GOOSE
Automation solutions
Tap changer control
Intelligent load shedding (active power +frequency)
Network changeover, stability supervision
Management of distributed generation in Smart Grid plants
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5 Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 includes all functions for effective monitoring of transmission
and subtransmission network
Self supervision
All internal hardware components and external interfaces, runtime of software
Clear text indication (cause of failure and countermeasure)
Monitoring of pri mary equipment
Operational log records process data with a time stamp (up to 2000 events)
Monitoring of the system through measurement supervision (voltage and frequency, power
and load) and through measuring transducer (analogue 4 to 20 mA ) inputs
(SF6 loss, gas pressure, temperature,)
Powerful fault analysis
Fault recording with a high sampling rate and a long period (8 kHz & 20s or 1 kHz & 160 s)
Trip log with 1 ms resolution and up to 1000 events
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
SICAM PAS
Netzleitstelle
SICAM PAS
Redundant i nterfaci ng to control center,
e.g. with DNP3, (bl ack)
Connecti on to both substati on systems
IEC 61850 (bl ue)
IEC 60870-5-103 (rot)
Separate connecti on to field level for
GOOSE communication IEC 61850 (grn)
Separate connecti on to DIGSI 5 PC wi th
Et hernet IEC 61850
SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 5
DIGSI 5
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

S
i
e
m
e
n
s

A
G

2
0
1
2
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
SIPROTEC 5
Protection
Control
Feeder Monitoring
Automation-Logic
Data Acquisition
Communication
Security
Test
Measurement
Fault Recording
Metering
Self Monitoring
SIPROTEC 5 includes powerful communi cation functionality
Flexible communication modules standard hardware components (physical hardware is independent
of software)
Support of standard communication protocols
IEC 61850; IEC 60870-5-103
DNPi 3.0,.
Flexible communication solutions are possible
Double 103 protocol
Redundant topologies with SSA
Powerful protection data interface (for differential protection, data exchange in substation, DIGSI 5
communication)
Communication is the key feature of all applications
Smart grid means flexibility in communication
SIPROTEC 5 supports Cyber Security requirements
Present standards are fulfilled (NERC CIP, BDEW,)
DIGSI 5 communication with encryption and strong password access
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G

DIGSI 5 Basics

0.
Agenda
1.
Specification of 220 kV Feeder
Protection and Automation
2.
3.
Hardware Overview
4.
Communication Modules
5.
Software Components
6.
Function Groups and Application Templates
7.
Order Configurator and Function Points
8.
Documentation
9.
DIGSI 5 - Overview
10.
DIGSI 5 - Configure
11.
DIGSI 5 - Control Functions
12.
DIGSI 5 - Online Connection to the device
13.
DIGSI 5 - Expansion of function points
14.
Curriculum Approach & Contacts

Siemens AG
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
siemens.com/poweracademy Restricted Siemens AG 2013 All rights reserved.
DIGSI 5 Basics
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G
S
I
E
M
E
N
S

A
G

Secure PDF Dig5 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Secure PDF Dig5 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

siemens.com/poweracademy Restricted Siemens AG 2013 All rights reserved.

Siemens Power Academy TD

SIPROTEC 5: Modular Hardware Design

Functions can be moved !

keeps away complexity ( see what you need )

reduces engi neering efforts

reduces engi neering efforts

If you know one answer you know both

SIPROTEC 5: Modular Hardware Design

Functions can be moved !

keeps away complexity ( see what you need )

reduces engi neering efforts

reduces engi neering efforts

If you know one answer you know both

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen